ys1500 indicating controller, ys1700 programmable indicating controller … · 2020-04-11 ·...

User’sManual YS1500 Indicating Controller

YS1700 ProgrammableIndicating ControllerUser’s Manual

IM 01B08B02-02EN

IM 01B08B02-02EN1st Edition

Functional

Enhancement

iIM 01B08B02-02EN

1st Edition : Jun. 2014 (YK)All Rights Reserved, Copyright © 2014 Yokogawa Electric Corporation

Introduction Thank you for purchasing the YS1000 series single-loop controller (hereinafter referred to as “YS1000”). This manual describes how to use YS1500 and YS1700 functions other than YS1500’s communication function and YS1700’s programmable and communication functions. Please read through this user’s manual carefully before using the product. Note that the manuals for the YS1500/YS1700 comprise the following five documents:

Printed manualManual Name Manual Number Description

YS1500/YS1700 Operation Guide IM 01B08B02-01EN This manual describes the basic operation method.

Electronic manualsManual Name Manual Number Description

YS1500/YS1700 Operation Guide IM 01B08B02-01EN This is identical to the printed manual.

YS1500/YS1700 User’s Manual IM 01B08B02-02EN This manual. It describes the usage of all functions except the programming and communication functions.

YS1000 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual IM 01B08J02-01EN

This manual describes how to use YS1000 in Ethernet, serial, and DCS-LCS communications. For communication wiring, see the Operation Guide.

YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700 Programmable Function User’s Manual IM 01B08K02-02EN

This manual describes how to use YSS1000 and YS1700’s programmable function and peer-to-peer communication function.

YS1000 Series Replacement Manual IM 01B08H02-01EN This manual describes the compatibility of installation and wiring with YS100, YS80, EBS, I, EK, HOMAC, and 100 line.

User’s manuals for YS1000 are available on the following web site: www.yokogawa.com/ns/ys/im/You need Adobe Reader 7.0 or later (but the latest version is recommended) installed on the computer in order to open and read the manuals.

Notice The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice as a result of continuing improvements to the

instrument’s performance and functions. Every effort has been made to ensure accuracy in the preparation of this manual. Should any errors or

omissions come to your attention, however, please inform YOKOGAWA Electric’s sales office or sales representative.

Under no circumstances may the contents of this manual, in part or in whole, be transcribed or copied without our permission.

Trademarks Our product names or brand names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of

YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation (hereinafter referred to as YOKOGAWA). Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows XP, and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks

of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Adobe, Acrobat, and Postscript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Ethernet is a registered trademark of XEROX Corporation. We do not use the TM or ® mark to indicate these trademarks or registered trademarks in this user's manual. All other product names mentioned in this user's manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their

respective companies.

ii IM 01B08B02-02EN

How to Use This Manual Usage

First read through the Operation Guide to understand the basic operations and then read this manual. For the programmable functions, communication functions, and replacements, see the respective manuals. This User’s Manual is organized into Chapters 1 to 9 as shown below:

Chapter Title and Description1 Control Function

Describes the functions, operations, and setting items in the controller mode (single-loop, cascade, selector, and programmable modes).

2 Auxiliary Control Function Describes functions and setting items auxiliary to the functions described in Chapter 1.

3 Auxiliary Input and Output Functions Describes the definition and setting items of the input and output terminals.

4 Display Function/Security Function Provides the LCD display functions, adjustments, and setting items.

5 Adjustment of Direct Inputs (Temperature, Resistance, and Frequency) Describes the settings and adjustments for the direct input converter built into the YS1000.

6 Power Failure Recovery Processing Describes operations performed after momentary power interruption and power failures.

7 Self-tuning Function Explains the self-tuning function and operations. It also describes self-tuning operations in the programmable mode.

8 Maintenance Describes ordinary inspections, indicating accuracy inspections, and part replacement cycles.

9 Specifications Provides the YS1000 specifications.

iiiIM 01B08B02-02EN

Symbols Used in This Manual

This symbol is used on the instrument. It indicates the possibility of injury to the user or damage to the instrument, and signifies that the user must refer to the user’s manual for special instructions. The same symbol is used in the user’s manual on pages that the user needs to refer to, together with the term “WARNING” or “CAUTION.”

WARNING

Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious or fatal injury to the user, and indicates precautions that should be taken to prevent such occurrences.

CAUTION

Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause injury to the user or damage to the instrument or property and indicates precautions that should be taken to prevent such occurrences.

NoteIdentifies important information required to operate the instrument.

Indicates related operations or explanations for the user’s reference.

[ ]Indicates a character string displayed on the display.

Setting Display

Indicates a setting display and describes the keystrokes required to display the relevant setting display.

Setting Details

Provides the descriptions of settings.

Description

Describes restrictions, etc. regarding a relevant operation.

Blank Page

vIM 01B08B02-02EN

9

8

7

6

Index

4

3

2

1

5

Contents

Introduction .......................................................................................................................................iHow to Use This Manual .................................................................................................................. iiSymbols Used in This Manual ........................................................................................................ iii

Chapter 1 Control Function1.1 Selecting the Controller Mode (CTL) ................................................................................ 1-1

1.1.1 Control in the Single-loop Mode (CTL = SINGLE) .................................................................1-3n Single-loop Control Function .............................................................................................1-6n Automatic Control/Manual Control .....................................................................................1-7

(1) Performing control using YS1000 only ...................................................................1-8n Automatic Control/Manual Control/Cascade Setting Automatic Control ..........................1-10

(1) Performing control based on an external setpoint from analog input ...................1-13(2) Performing control based on an external setpoint through communication,

or backup operation if the high-level computer fails in communication. ...............1-16(3) Performing control based on an external manipulated output variable through

communication, or backup operation if the high-level computer fails in communication .....................................................................................................1-19

1.1.2 Control in the Cascade Mode (CTL = CAS) ........................................................................1-23n Cascade Control Function ...............................................................................................1-26n Automatic Control/Manual Control ....................................................................................1-27

(1) Performing control using YS1000 only .................................................................1-29n Automatic Control/Manual Control/Cascade Setting Automatic Control ..........................1-32

(1) Performing control based on an external setpoint from analog input ...................1-36(2) Performing control based on an external setpoint through communication/

backup operation if the high-level computer fails in communication ....................1-40(3) Performing control based on an external manipulated output variable through

communication, or backup operation if the high-level computer fails in communication .....................................................................................................1-46

1.1.3 Control in the Selector Mode (CTL = SELECT) ...................................................................1-51n Selector Control Function ................................................................................................1-54n Automatic Control/Manual Control ...................................................................................1-55

(1) Performing control using YS1000 only for both loops 1 and 2 .............................1-57n Automatic Control/Manual Control/Cascade Setting Automatic Control ..........................1-60

(1) Controlling loop 1 using YS1000 only and loop 2 based on an external setpoint from analog input ....................................................................................1-64

(2) Controlling loop 1 based on an external setpoint from analog input and loop 2 using YS1000 only ...............................................................................................1-69

(3) Controlling both loops 1 and 2 based on external setpoints from analog inputs ...1-73(4) Loop 1 is controlled based on an external setpoint through communication

(backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication), while loop 2 is controlled by YS1000 only. ...................................................................................1-78

(5) Loop 1 is controlled based on an external setpoint through communication (backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication), while loop 2 is based on an external setpoint from analog input. ................................................1-84

(6) Control is performed based on an external manipulated output variable through communication (backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication). ..1-91

(7) Performing control based on external manipulated output variable through communication (backing it up if the high-level computer fails in communication) and based on an external setpoint for loop 2 from analog input ..........................1-96

1.1.4 Control in the Programmable Mode (CTL = PROG) (YS1700 Only) .................................1-103

vi IM 01B08B02-02EN

1.2 Selecting the Control Method (Selecting Control Type CNT and Control Operation Formula ALG) .............................................................................................................. 1-1041.2.1 Performing Stable Control without Abrupt Output Changes

(PV Proportional Type PID (I-PD)) ....................................................................................1-1061.2.2 Performing Control with Emphasis on Setpoint Follow-up

(PV Derivative Type PID (PI-D)) ........................................................................................1-1071.2.3 Stopping Integral Action to Conduct Control with Less Overshoot (Output Limiter) ..........1-1081.2.4 Performing Stable Control in Which a Setpoint is not Exceeded

(Proportional (PD) Control) ................................................................................................1-1091.2.5 Performing Control with Quick Rise (PID Control with Reset Bias) ................................... 1-1121.2.6 Performing Stable Control for the Step Response of Setpoints

(Adjustable Setpoint Filter) ................................................................................................ 1-1141.2.7 Performing Control with Gain Characteristics Such as Neutralization Control

(Non-linear PID Control) ....................................................................................................1-1171.2.8 Performing Control Canceling out Disturbance (Feedforward Control) .............................1-1211.2.9 Controlling a Process with Long Dead Time (Sample-and-hold PI Control) ......................1-1241.2.10 Performing Control with Rapidly Settling Setpoints (Batch PID Control

(YS1700 Programmable Mode Only)) ...............................................................................1-1261.2.11 Performing Control Switching Multiple PID Parameters (Preset PID

(YS1700 Programmable Mode Only)) ...............................................................................1-127

Chapter 2 Auxiliary Control Function2.1 Compensating or Computing Process Variables (Multi-function Mode Only) .................. 2-1

2.1.1 Input Filter (First-order Lag Operation) ..................................................................................2-12.1.2 Square Root Extraction (Low Cutoff Adjustable) ...................................................................2-12.1.3 10-segment Linearizer Function ............................................................................................2-22.1.4 Ratio Operation ......................................................................................................................2-3

2.2 Using the Tracking Function (Multi-function Mode Only) ................................................. 2-42.2.1 Output Tracking .....................................................................................................................2-42.2.2 Cascade Setting Value Tracking (Single-loop Mode Only) ....................................................2-52.2.3 Process Variable Tracking (Single-loop Mode Only) .............................................................2-6

2.3 Changing the Control Operation Direction and Valve Direction ...................................... 2-72.4 Using Preset MV ............................................................................................................. 2-82.5 Using the Event Function ................................................................................................ 2-9

2.5.1 Displaying Messages (Event Display Function (Settable Only in YSS1000) ........................2-92.5.2 Changing the PV Bar Display Color in the Event of a Process Alarm

(Active Color Display Function) .......................................................................................... 2-112.5.3 Operator Notification Using Tag Number Display (Alternate Tag Number Color Display

Function) .............................................................................................................................2-122.6 Setting the Alarm Function ............................................................................................ 2-132.7 Setting Alarm Output Hysteresis ................................................................................... 2-14

viiIM 01B08B02-02EN

9

8

7

6

Index

4

3

2

1

5

Chapter 3 Auxiliary Input and Output Functions 3.1 Defining Digital Input and Output Functions (Multi-function Mode Only) ......................... 3-1

3.1.1 Switching Digital Terminals between Input and Output ..........................................................3-23.1.2 Switching Digital Input Contact Type ......................................................................................3-23.1.3 Switching Digital Output Contact Type ...................................................................................3-33.1.4 Changing Digital Input Functions ...........................................................................................3-4

(1) Automatic switching (E-AUT) .....................................................................................3-4(2) Manual switching (E-MAN) ........................................................................................3-4(3) Preset MV switching (E-PMV) ...................................................................................3-5(4) Output tracking switching (E-TRK) ............................................................................3-5(5) Output preset and manual switching (TR-MPMV) .....................................................3-5(6) Self-tuning switching (E-STC) ...................................................................................3-6(7) Cascade open/close switching (E-O/C) .....................................................................3-6(8) Loop 2 local/remote switching (E-L/R) .......................................................................3-6(9) Selector selection (E-SEL) ........................................................................................3-6(10) LCD backlight off (LCD-OFF) ..................................................................................3-7(11) Manual switching (TR-MAN), automatic switching (TR-AUT), and cascade

switching (TR-CAS) ...............................................................................................3-7(12) Output loop selection (E-LPSEL)...............................................................................3-7(13) All event elimination (TR-EVT.C) ............................................................................3-7

3.1.5 Changing Digital Output Functions.........................................................................................3-93.2 Switching Analog Output 3’s Voltage and Current ......................................................... 3-133.3 Changing the Output Types of Analog Outputs 2, 3 and 4 ............................................ 3-14

Chapter 4 Display and Security Functions4.1 Display Function ............................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.1 Setting Visible/Invisible Status of the Operation Display ........................................................4-14.1.2 Setting Visible/Invisible Status of TREND Display Data ........................................................4-34.1.3 Changing the Time Span of TREND Displays ........................................................................4-44.1.4 Setting Display Data on the TREND 3 Display .......................................................................4-54.1.5 Changing Scale Divisions on the LOOP, TREND, and DUAL Displays .................................4-64.1.6 Automatic Scale Divisions/Making Scale Values More Legible on the METER Display ..... 4-74.1.7 Selecting the Operation Display to be Displayed First at Power ON......................................4-84.1.8 Turning the LCD Backlight ON/OFF .......................................................................................4-94.1.9 Changing the Background and Loop Colors ........................................................................4-104.1.10 Adjusting LCD Brightness .................................................................................................... 4-11

4.2 Security Function ............................................................................................................ 4-124.2.1 Setting/Releasing Keylock ...................................................................................................4-124.2.2 Inhibiting/Enabling Parameter Change.................................................................................4-13

Chapter 5 Adjusting Direct Inputs (Temperature/Resistance/Frequency) 5.1 List of Direct Input Specifications and Basic Operations .................................................. 5-15.2 Setting Sensor Type ........................................................................................................ 5-45.3 Setting Burnout ................................................................................................................. 5-55.4 Making Zero and Span Adjustments of Input .................................................................. 5-6

Chapter 6 Processing during Power Failures6.1 Processing during Power Failures .................................................................................... 6-1

viii IM 01B08B02-02EN

Chapter 7 Self-tuning Function7.1 Overview of Self-tuning Function ..................................................................................... 7-1

7.1.1 What is Self-tuning? ...............................................................................................................7-17.1.2 Features and Usage Effects ..................................................................................................7-1

7.2 Operation Principle ........................................................................................................... 7-27.2.1 Self-tuning .............................................................................................................................7-27.2.2 Response Monitoring ............................................................................................................7-27.2.3 Estimating Process Characteristics .......................................................................................7-27.2.4 PID Parameter Tuning ...........................................................................................................7-3

7.3 Self-tuning Parameters and Operations .......................................................................... 7-47.3.1 Parameters and Operations ...................................................................................................7-4

7.4 Self-tuning (STC) Operations in Each Operation Mode ................................................. 7-107.4.1 STC Mode Selection = ATSTUP ...........................................................................................7-117.4.2 STC Mode Selection = DISP ...............................................................................................7-127.4.3 STC Mode Selection = ON ..................................................................................................7-137.4.4 STC Mode Selection = OFF ................................................................................................7-137.4.5 On-demand Tuning (OD) .....................................................................................................7-137.4.6 Starting and Stopping the Self-tuning Function ...................................................................7-147.4.7 Combining STC with Various Control Functions .................................................................7-187.4.8 Self-tuning Alarms ...............................................................................................................7-20

7.5 Simulation Test .............................................................................................................. 7-227.5.1 Scope of Application ............................................................................................................7-227.5.2 Simulation Examples ...........................................................................................................7-22

7.6 Application Guide ........................................................................................................... 7-247.6.1 Stable Control Loop (Continuous Control) ..........................................................................7-247.6.2 Controlling Processes Where Dead Time is a Dominant Factor .........................................7-247.6.3 Cascade Control ..................................................................................................................7-247.6.4 Following Fluctuations in Controlled System Characteristics

(Dead Time, Lag Time, and Gain) .......................................................................................7-257.6.5 Neutralization Process ........................................................................................................7-257.6.6 Controlling Tank Levels Having Integral Characteristics .....................................................7-267.6.7 Control of Process with Hysteresis Characteristics .............................................................7-267.6.8 Control of Process with Slow Response of Final Control Element ......................................7-277.6.9 Control Using Program Pattern ...........................................................................................7-277.6.10 Combining Control with Sequence Control (Batch Control) ................................................7-287.6.11 Control of Loops with Interference ......................................................................................7-287.6.12 Control of a Loop Having Impulse Noise .............................................................................7-29

Chapter 8 Maintenance 8.1 Inspecting Indication Accuracy ........................................................................................ 8-1

8.1.1 Calibration Instruments ..........................................................................................................8-18.1.2 Inspecting Input Indication Accuracy ......................................................................................8-28.1.3 Inspecting Output Indication Accuracy ..................................................................................8-2

8.2 Recommended Part Replacement Period ....................................................................... 8-38.3 Packaging when Shipping the Product for Repair ........................................................... 8-4

ixIM 01B08B02-02EN

9

8

7

6

Index

4

3

2

1

5

Chapter 9 Specifications9.1 General Specifications ..................................................................................................... 9-1

Input and Output Signals ...................................................................................................................9-1Isolation of Signals from Each Other ......................................................................................9-3Transmitter Power Supply .....................................................................................................9-4Communication Signal Specifications ....................................................................................9-4

Operating Conditions .........................................................................................................................9-5Reference Operating Conditions ...........................................................................................9-6Reference Performance .........................................................................................................9-6Influence of Operating Conditions ..........................................................................................9-7Direct Input Specifications ......................................................................................................9-7Structure, Mounting (Basic Type) ...........................................................................................9-9Safety Standards ..................................................................................................................9-10

Index

Revision Information

Blank Page

1-1IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

11.1 Selecting the Controller Mode (CTL)

Setting Display

Engineering Display

0101E.ai

Operation Display > SHIFT + keys (to the Tuning Menu Display) > SHIFT + keys (to the Engineering Menu Display) > [CONFIG1] software key (Configuration Display 1)

Setting Details

Parameter Name Setting Range Factory Default

CTL Controller mode selection

PROG: Programmable mode (*1) SINGLE: Single-loop mode CAS: Cascade mode SELECT: Selector mode

For YS1500: SINGLE For YS1700: PROG

*1: Selectable only in YS1700 For programmable mode: see YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700 Programmable Function

User's Manual.

Description

YS1500 has the following three control functions (controller mode). Single-loop mode, cascade mode, and selector mode, which are generically called the “multi-function mode.” Setting up the controller mode allows the indicating controller to operate as a single-loop, cascade, or selector controller.The multi-function mode's control period is 100 ms.

YS1500

control function

Single-loop mode (SINGLE)

Cascade mode (CAS)

Selector mode (SELECT)

1.1.1

1.1.2

1.1.3

0101-01E.ai

Multi-function

mode

YS1500 Control Function

Chapter 1 Control Function

1-2 IM 01B08B02-02EN

YS1700 is a programmable controller enabling the user to freely create computation and control functions. YS1700's control functions include the programmable mode and the same multi-function mode (single-loop, cascade, and selector modes) as that of YS1500. Use of the multi-function mode enables YS1700 to have the same functions as YS1500, eliminating the need for creating user programs. The multi-function mode's control period is 100 ms. The control period in the programmable mode can be selected from among 50, 100, and 200 ms, which is achieved using YSS1000 Setting Software (available as an option).

Programmable mode (user programs) (PROG)YS1700 control function


Cascade mode (CAS)

Selector mode (SELECT)

Same functions as those of YS1500

0101-02E.ai

1.1.4

1.1.1

1.1.2

1.1.3

Multi-function

mode

YS1700 Control Function


1-3IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

11.1.1 Control in the Single-loop Mode (CTL = SINGLE) In the single-loop mode, YS1000 operates as a single-loop controller. When the single-loop mode is selected, YS1000 configures the functions as shown in the figure below. Setting and changing the parameters (in blue bold characters) shown in the figure enables the required function to be realized. For parameters: see “List of Parameters” in the YS1500 Indicating Controller/YS1700

Programmable Indicating Controller Operation Guide.


1-4IM

01B08B

02-02EN

TRK1

0102E.ai

DI7(DI7F = Function not set)




DO7(DO7F = Function not set)




Square root extraction and

low cutoff adjustableCLC1

Square root extraction and low cutoff adjustable

PLC1

Input filterFLG

Input filterPLG1

Deviation alarmDL1

Control elementsCNT1,ALG1

Preset MVPMV1

Output limitersMH1,ML1

Input filterCLG1

10-segment line conversion101 to 111

Process variable alarmsPH1,PL1,HH1,LL1,

VL1

Ratio and biasCGN1 (CIN1+CBI1)+

CBO1

Input filterTLG

Gain and biasFGN (FIN+FBI) +FBO

DI function selection DI1

(Parameter DI1F : Function not set)

Cascade setting inputX2

Measurement inputX1

Feedforward inputX4

(*1)

SV key

PV display

SV display

DIn=OPEN (AUT)

PF key operation

(CMOD1=CAS)

DIn=CLOSE(CAS)

C/A external switching (Note 1) DInF=E-AUT

Self-tuningSTC

STC start (Note 1)DInF=E-STC

ParameterPFKEY=STC

FF1

SV1PV1

CIN1

CSW1ON

OFF

CSR1ON

OFF

PSR1ON

OFF

FX1ON

OFF

FIN

FSWON

OFF

FON

ONOFF

DIn=CLOSE

DIn=CLOSE

Output tracking (Note 1)DInF=E-TRK

Preset MV switching (Note 1)DInF=E-PMV

Output preset MV and MAN (Note 1)

DInF=TR-MPMV

DIn=OPEN

DIn=OPEN

Switching by pressing “C” (Note 1)DInF=TR-CASSwitching by pressing “A” (Note 1)DInF=TR-AUTSwitching by pressing “M” (Note 1)DInF=TR-MAN

DInF,DIn(n=1, 7, 8, 9, 10)

C, A/M external switching (Note 1)

DInF=E-MAN

Backlight OFF (Note 1) DInF=LCD-OFF

DIn=OPEN

MV key

DIn=CLOSE

MV displayNote 1: One of them can be selected.

Moreover, changing DI/DO function assignment enables multiple contacts to be selected.

*1: Expandable I/O terminal of YS1700 basic type (with expandable I/O)

(*1)

DO1PV high-limit alarm output (Parameter

DO1F = PH1)

DO2PV low-limit alarm output (Parameter

DO2F = PL1)

DO3PV velocity

alarm output (Parameter

DO3F = VL1)

DO4C/A, M status

output (Parameter

DO4F = CAS)

DO5C, A/M status

output (Parameter

DO5F = CASAUT)

Y1MV output 1 (4–20 mA)

Y2MV output 2

(1–5 V) (Parameter Y2S = MV1)

Y4PV output (1–5 V)

(Parameter Y4S = PV1)

(*1)

Y3SV output (1–5 V)

(Parameter Y3S = SV1)

LCD backlight

Output tracking inputX3

–

+

FP

< >

Single-loop Mode Function Block Diagram (for YS1700)

1.1 Selecting the Controller M

ode (CTL)

1-5IM

01B08B

02-02EN

Control Function 1TRK1

0102E.ai









Square root extraction and

low cutoff adjustableCLC1


PLC1

Input filterFLG

Input filterPLG1

Deviation alarmDL1

Control elementsCNT1,ALG1

Preset MVPMV1


Input filterCLG1



VL1


CBO1

Input filterTLG





Measurement inputX1

Feedforward inputX4

(*1)

SV key

PV display

SV display

DIn=OPEN (AUT)

PF key operation

(CMOD1=CAS)

DIn=CLOSE(CAS)

C/A external switching (Note 1) DInF=E-AUT

Self-tuningSTC


ParameterPFKEY=STC

FF1

SV1PV1

CIN1

CSW1ON

OFF

CSR1ON

OFF

PSR1ON

OFF

FX1ON

OFF

FIN

FSWON

OFF

FON

ONOFF

DIn=CLOSE

DIn=CLOSE




DInF=TR-MPMV

DIn=OPEN

DIn=OPEN

Switching by pressing “C” (Note 1)DInF=TR-CASSwitching by pressing “A” (Note 1)DInF=TR-AUTSwitching by pressing “M” (Note 1)DInF=TR-MAN

DInF,DIn(n=1, 7, 8, 9, 10)

C, A/M external switching (Note 1)

DInF=E-MAN


DIn=OPEN

MV key

DIn=CLOSE

MV displayNote 1: One of them can be selected.

Moreover, changing DI/DO function assignment enables multiple contacts to be selected.


(*1)

DO1PV high-limit alarm output (Parameter

DO1F = PH1)

DO2PV low-limit alarm output (Parameter

DO2F = PL1)

DO3PV velocity

alarm output (Parameter

DO3F = VL1)

DO4C/A, M status

output (Parameter

DO4F = CAS)

DO5C, A/M status

output (Parameter

DO5F = CASAUT)


Y2MV output 2




(*1)



LCD backlight

Output tracking inputX3

–

+

FP

< >

Single-loop Mode Function Block Diagram (for YS1700)


ode (CTL)

1-6 IM 01B08B02-02EN

n Single-loop Control Function

Control elementsControl type: Standard PID control, proportional (PD) control, or sample-and-hold PI control Control operation formulas: For standard PID control, select the formula from the following:

• PV proportional type PID (I-PD) • PV derivative type PID (PI-D)• Adjustable setpoint filter (SVF)

For proportional (PD) control, be sure to select PV derivative type PID (PI-D). For control types and control operation formulas: see 1.2, Selecting the Control Method (Selecting

Control Type CNT and Control Operation Formula ALG), in this manual.

Main parameter functionsMain Functions Reference Destination

Filter function 2.1.1, Input Filter (First-order Lag Operation)

Square root extraction 2.1.2, Square Root Extraction (Low Cutoff Adjustable)

10-segment line 2.1.3, 10-segment Linearizer Function

Ratio, gain, and bias functions 2.1.4, Ratio Operation

Alarm function 3.1.5, Changing Digital Output Functions

Self-tuning function Chapter 7, Self-tuning Function

Preset MV function 2.4, Using Preset MV

Output limiter function 1.2.3, Stopping Integral Action to Conduct Control with Less Overshoot (Output Limiter)

Other functionsMain Functions Reference Destination

Contact input function Chapter 3, Auxiliary Input and Output Functions

Contact output function

Display function Chapter 4, Display and Security Functions

Communication function YS1000 Series Communication Interface User's Manual


1-7IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1n Automatic Control/Manual Control

Setting Display

Engineering Display

0103E.ai


Setting Details

To perform automatic control/manual control only, set CMOD1 = − (no setting). The operations described in “(1) Performing control using YS1000 only” apply.


CMOD1 C-mode 1 −: No setting CAS: Analog cascade setting mode CMP: Computer cascade setting mode

− (no setting)

Description

The operation mode can be switched by pressing the “A” or “M” mode key on the instrument's front panel.

Automatic control (A) if the “A” mode key is pressed Manual control (M) if the “M” mode key is pressed

Switching to each operation mode can be achieved based on digital input (DI), through communication, or using user programs in addition to using keys on the instrument's front panel.

For switching using keys on the instrument's front panel: see YS1500 Indicating Controller/YS1700 Programmable Indicating Controller Operation Guide.

For switching through communication: see YS1000 Series Communication Interface User's Manual.

For switching based on digital input: see 3.1, Defining Digital Input and Output Functions (Multi-function Mode Only), in this manual.

For switching using user programs: see YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700 Programmable Function User's Manual.

Meaning of SymbolsThe following shows the operation mode symbols and their meanings:

Symbol Meaning

(M) Manual control (M)

(A) Automatic control (A)


1-8 IM 01B08B02-02EN

(1) Performing control using YS1000 only Only automatic control (A) or manual control (M) is available. Operation does not change even if the C mode key on the instrument's front panel is pressed.

Parameter Name Setpoint

CMOD1 C-mode 1 −: No setting

3 /.

X1

Y1

(M) (A)

–

Measurement input

Process variable (PV1)

“A” lamp or “M” lamp lights.

Manipulated output

Manipulated output variable (MV1)

Setpoint (SV1)

Control elementCNT1

0104E.ai

Function Block Diagram and Operation Mode Relationship Diagram


1-9IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1

AUT MAN

(A)

(M)

AUT

MAN

Automatic control

Manual control

: Pressing the “A” mode key : Pressing the “M” mode key

*: Operation does not change even if the C mode key is pressed.

0105E.ai

AUT, MAN, CAS: Sends a communication commands (YS protocol)

A

A

A

M

M

M

Status Transition Diagram When the Operation Mode is Changed Using Keys or through Communication

Display Status of the Instrument's Front Panel in Each Operation Mode

Operation Mode Instrument's Front Panel Lamps

Automatic control (A) “A” lamp lights.

Manual control (M) “M” lamp lights.

Setpoints and Manipulated Output Variables in Each Operation Mode

Operation Mode Setpoint (SV1) Manipulated Output Variable (MV1)

Automatic control (A) Set using a key or through communication (*1) Outputs control operation results.

Manual control (M) Set using a key or through communication (*1)

Set using a key or through communication (*2)

*1: Set to communication register SV1 *2: Set to communication register MV1 For setting through communication: see YS1000 Series Communication Interface User's

Manual.

Control Status Effected Instantly Upon Transition to Each Operation Mode

Operation Mode Transition

Status Effected Instantly Upon Transition to Each Operation Mode

Setpoint (SV1) Control Status

(A) → (M) The setpoint immediately before transition is held.

The manipulated output variable immediately before transition is held, enabling manual operation.

(M) → (A) The setpoint immediately before transition is held.

Switching is made bumplessly with the manipulated output variable immediately before transition used as the initial value for performing automatic control.


1-10 IM 01B08B02-02EN

n Automatic Control/Manual Control/Cascade Setting Automatic Control

Setting Display

Engineering Display

0106E.ai


Setting Details

To perform automatic control, manual control, or cascade setting automatic control, set CMOD1 = CAS or CMP. Any of operations (1) to (3) is performed according to the setting. (1) Operation is controlled based on an external setpoint from analog input. (2) Operation is controlled based on an external setpoint through communication, or

backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication. (3) Operation is controlled based on an external manipulated output variable through

communication, or backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication. Parameter Name Setting Range Factory Default


− (No setting)

BMOD1 Backup mode 1

BUA: Automatic operation backup mode BUM: Manual operation backup mode BUM

Description

The operation mode can be switched to the following three types by pressing the “C,” “A,” or “M” mode keys on the instrument's front panel.

Automatic control (A) if the “A” mode key is pressed Manual control (M) if the “M” mode key is pressed Cascade setting automatic control (C) if the “C” mode key is pressed

In addition to the keys on the instrument's front panel, switching to each operation mode can be achieved based on digital input (DI), through communication, or using user programs.






1-11IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1Cascade setting automatic control (C mode) Cascade setting automatic control (C) is a mode in which control is performed based on an external setpoint (SV) (through communication or from analog input). Cascade setting automatic control (C),* requiring use of the “C” mode key, performs different operations depending on the setting of the C-mode 1 (CMOD1) parameter. In cascade setting automatic control (C), there is the analog cascade setting mode (CAS) and the computer cascade setting mode (CMP). Moreover, the computer cascade setting mode (CMP) has SPC and DDC modes. *: Cascade setting automatic control is not (internal) cascade control. For cascade control, see

1.1.2, Control in the Cascade Mode (CTL = CAS).

Cascade Mode (Parameter CMOD1)

Communication Mode

Cascade setting automatic control (C)

Analog cascade setting mode (CAS) −

Computer cascade setting mode (CMP) SPC mode (*)

DDC mode (*)

No setting (−) −

*: Selection of the SPC or DDC mode is accomplished using communication register LS1. These modes cannot be set from the instrument's front panel.

Write “SPC” to LS1 to use cascade setting automatic control in the SPC mode, or “DDC” to use it in the DDC mode.

The SV key cannot be operated in the SPC mode. The SV and MV keys cannot be operated in the DDC mode. For SPC and DDC modes: see YS1000 Series Communication Interface User's Manual.

Backup modeThe backup mode is available in the computer cascade setting mode (CMOD1 = CMP). If writing in watchdog timer from the high-level computer is lost during the period set by YS1000's communication watchdog timer, the YS1000 determines that the computer has failed in communication. The YS1000 then disconnects from it and automatically changes the operation mode. This operating status is called “backup mode” and there are the following two types of backup mode. Backup mode is set using the backup mode 1 (BMOD1) engineering parameter.

Automatic operation backup mode (BUA): The transition of operation from cascade setting automatic control (C) to the automatic

operation backup mode (BUA) is equivalent to automatic control (A). In this mode, the “C” lamp is lit and the “A” lamp blinks on the instrument's front panel. If the high-level computer recovers communication in this condition, operation changes to cascade setting automatic control (C).

Manual operation backup mode (BUM): The transition of operation from cascade setting automatic control (C) to manual

operation backup mode (BUM) is equivalent to manual control (M). In this mode, the “C” lamp is lit and the “M” lamp blinks on the instrument's front panel. If the high-level computer recovers communication in this condition, operation changes to cascade setting automatic control (C).


1-12 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Meaning of Symbols The following shows the operation mode symbols and their meanings:

Symbol Meaning



(C) (CAS) Cascade setting automatic control (C) – analog cascade setting mode (CAS) status

(C) (CMP) (SPC) Cascade setting automatic control (C) – computer cascade setting mode (CMP) – cascade backup mode (SPC) status based on an external setpoint

(C) (CMP) (DDC)Cascade setting automatic control (C) – computer cascade setting mode (CMP) – cascade backup mode (DDC) status based on an external manipulated output variable

(BUM)

Manual operation backup status due to a communication failure by the high-level computer (Same operation as manual control is performed and control automatically returns to cascade setting automatic control if the communication failure is cleared.)

(BUA)

Automatic operation backup status due to a communication failure by the high-level computer (Same operation as automatic control is performed and control automatically returns to cascade setting automatic control if the communication failure is cleared.)


1-13IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1(1) Performing control based on an external setpoint from analog input

YS1000 accepts an external setpoint from an analog input (terminal X2) to perform control.


CMOD1 C-mode 1 CAS: Analog cascade setting mode

X1X2

(C)

(A)/(C)(M)

(A)

Y1

Control elementCNT1

–Setpoint (SV1)



“C” , “A” , or “M” lamp lights.

[CAS] is displayed in cascade control.

An analog cascade setting value is displayed.

Measurement inputCascade setting input

Manipulated output0107E.ai



1-14 IM 01B08B02-02EN

AUT

MAN

MAN

CAS

AUT

(A)

CAS,MAN

C

Cascade setting automatic control

(A): Automatic control status (M): Manual control status (C): Analog cascade setting automatic

control status

AUT, MAN, CAS: Sends a communication commands (YS protocol)

Automatic control

(C)(CAS)

Manual control: Pressing the “A” mode key

: Pressing the “M” mode key

: Pressing the “C” mode key

(M)

AUT

CAS

0108E.ai

A

A

A

A

M

MM

C

C

C

C

M



Operation Mode Instrument's Front Panel

Lamps

LOOP 1 or METER 1 Display's Control Status Display Section

Manual control (M) “M” lamp lights. No display (*1)

Automatic control (A) “A” lamp lights. No display (*1) Cascade setting automatic control (C) (CAS) “C” lamp lights [CAS] is displayed. (*1)

*1: [CSV1] (cascade setting input value) is displayed on the LOOP 1 Display.

Setpoints, Manipulated Output Variables, and Control Status in Each Operation Mode


Control Status



Manual

Automatic control (A)


Outputs control operation results. Automatic

Cascade setting automatic control (C) (CAS)

External setpoint from analog input (terminal X2)

Outputs control operation results. Cascade


Manual.


1-15IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1Status Effected Instantly Upon Transition to Each Operation Mode

Operation Mode Transition Status Effected Instantly Upon Transition to Each Operation Mode


(M) → (C) (CAS) Switching from (M) to (C) (CAS) is impossible. (Switch once from (M) to (A) and then switch from (A) to (C) (CAS)).

(M) → (A) The setpoint immediately before transition is held.

Switching is made bumplessly using the manipulated output variable immediately before transition used as the initial value to perform automatic control.

(A) → (C) (CAS) Responds to cascade setting value quickly.

Switching is made bumplessly to perform cascade setting automatic control.

(A) → (M) The setpoint immediately before transition is held.


(C) (CAS) → (A) The setpoint immediately before transition is held. Switching is made bumplessly to perform automatic control.

(C) (CAS) → (M) The setpoint immediately before transition is held.



1-16 IM 01B08B02-02EN

(2) Performing control based on an external setpoint through communication, or backup operation if the high-level computer fails in communication.

YS1000 accepts an external setpoint through communication to perform control. If the high-level computer generally performing control fails in communication, the YS1000 backs up operation. If the computer recovers communication, control returns to the original condition.


CMOD1 C-mode 1 CMP: Computer cascade setting mode

BMOD1 Backup mode 1 BUA: Automatic operation backup mode BUM: Manual operation backup mode

Register Name Setpoint

LS1 Operation mode 1 SPC: SPC mode

X1

(C)

(A)/(BUA)/(C)(M)/(BUM)

(A)/(BUA)

Y1

Control elementCNT1

–Setpoint (SV1)


RS-485 communication



[SPC] is displayed in cascade control. In backup mode condition, [BUA] or [BUM] is displayed.

Measurement input

Manipulated output

Communication parameter SV1

0109E.ai



1-17IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1

MAN

: Pressing the “A” mode key



MAN

MAN

A

M

(C)(CMP)(SPC)

Automatic control Cascade setting automatic control

Manual control

MAN

(BUM) (BUA)

Parameter: BMOD1

AUTO

For use of the backup mode

Communication failed

Communication recovered

AUT

MAN

MAN

SPC

AUT(A)

(M)

SPC

AUT

MAN

A

M

MAN AUT

0120E.ai

If writing in watchdog timer from the high-level computer is lost during the period set by YS1000's communication watchdog timer, the YS1000 determines that the computer has failed in communication. The YS1000 then disconnects from it and automatically changes the operation mode. If communication fails, the operation mode changes to (BUM) or (BUA). If communication recovers, it returns to (C) (CMP) (SPC).

AUT, MAN, SPC, DDC: Sends a communication commands (YS protocol)

C

C

C

A

A

A

A

A

M

M

MM

M



1-18 IM 01B08B02-02EN


Operation Mode Instrument's Front

Panel Lamps


Manual control (M) “M” lamp lights. No display

Automatic control (A) “A” lamp lights. No display

Cascade setting automatic control (C) (CAS) (SPC) “C” lamp lights [SPC] is displayed. Automatic operation backup status due to communication failure by the high-level computer (BUA)

“C” lamp lights and the “A” lamp blinks. [BUA] is displayed.

Manual operation backup status due to communication failure by the high-level computer (BUM)

“C” lamp lights and the “M” lamp blinks. [BUM] is displayed.



Control Status


Set using a key or through communication (*2) Manual

Automatic control (A) Set using a key or through communication (*1)


Cascade setting automatic control (C) (CMP) (SPC) Set through communication (*1)

Outputs control operation results. Cascade

Automatic operation backup status due to communication failure by the high-level computer (BUA)







Manual.




(M) → (C) (CMP) (SPC) Switching from (M) to (C) (CMP) (SPC) is impossible. (Switch once from (M) to (A) and then switch from (A) to (C) (CMP) (SPC)).

(BUM) → (C) (CMP) (SPC)The setpoint immediately before transition is held.

Performs cascade setting automatic control with the manipulated output variable immediately before transition used as the initial value.

(M) or (BUM) → (A)The setpoint immediately before transition is held.

Switching is made bumplessly with the manipulated output variable immediately before transition used as the initial value to perform automatic control.

(A) or (BUA) → (C) (CMP) (SPC)The setpoint immediately before transition is held.

Switching is made bumplessly to perform cascade setting automatic control.

(A) or (BUA) → (M)The setpoint immediately before transition is held.


(C) (CMP) (SPC) → (A) or (BUA)The setpoint immediately before transition is held.

Switching is made bumplessly to perform automatic control.

(C) (CMP) (SPC) → (M) or (BUM)The setpoint immediately before transition is held.



1-19IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1(3) Performing control based on an external manipulated output variable through communication, or backup operation if the high-level computer fails in communication

YS1000 accepts an external manipulated output variable through communication to perform control. If the high-level computer generally performing control fails in communication, the YS1000 backs up operation. If the computer recovers communication, control returns to the original condition.





LS1 Operation mode 1 DDC: DDC mode

X1

(C)

(A)/(BUA)

(M)/(BUM)

Y1

Control elementCNT1

–Setpoint (SV1)





[DDC] is displayed in cascade control. In backup mode condition, [BUA] or [BUM] is displayed.

Measurement input

Manipulated output

Communication parameter MV1

0121E.ai



1-20 IM 01B08B02-02EN

AUT

MAN

: Pressing the “A” mode key



MAN

DDC

AUT(A)

(M)

DDC

AUT

MAN

A

A

M

(C)(CMP)(DDC)

C

Automatic controlCascade setting automatic control

Manual control

MAN

(BUM) (BUA)

Parameter: BMOD1

M

AUT




DDCCC

0122E.ai

If writing in watchdog timer from the high-level computer is lost during the period set by YS1000's communication watchdog timer, the YS1000 determines that the computer has failed in communication. The YS1000 then disconnects from it and automatically changes the operation mode. If communication fails, the operation mode changes to (BUM) or (BUA). If communication recovers, it returns to (C) (CMP) (DDC).

AUT, MAN, DDC: Sends a communication commands (YS protocol)

C

C

C

C

A

A

A

A

A

M

M

MM

M



1-21IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1Display Status of the Instrument's Front Panel in Each Operation Mode

Operation Mode Instrument's Front Panel

Lamps


Manual control (M) “M” lamp lights. No display

Automatic control (A) “A” lamp lights. No display

Cascade setting automatic control (C) (CMP) (DDC) “C” lamp lights [DDC] is displayed.


“C” lamp lights and the “A” lamp blinks.

[BUA] is displayed.


“C” lamp lights and the “M” lamp blinks.

[BUM] is displayed.


Operation Mode Setpoint (SV1) Manipulated Output Variable (MV1) Control Status



Automatic control (A) Set using a key or through communication (*1)


Cascade setting automatic control (C) (CMP) (DDC)


Set through communication (*2) Cascade








Manual.




(M) or (BUM) → (C) (CMP) (DDC)The setpoint immediately before transition is held.

The manipulated output variable immediately before transition is held. Output operation from the high-level computer Switching from (M) to (C) (CMP) (DDC) is impossible. (Switch once from (M) to (A) and then switch from (A) to (C) (CMP) (DDC)).

(M) or (BUM) → (A)The setpoint immediately before transition is held.

Switching is made bumplessly with a manipulated output variable immediately before transition used as an initial value to perform automatic control.

(A) or (BUA) → (C) (CMP) (DDC)The setpoint immediately before transition is held.

The manipulated output variable immediately before transition is held. Output operation from the high-level computer

(A) or (BUA) → (M)The setpoint immediately before transition is held.


(C) (CMP) (DDC) → (A) or (BUA)The setpoint immediately before transition is held.


(C) (CMP) (DDC) → (M) or (BUM)The setpoint immediately before transition is held.



1-22 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Intentionally blank


1-23IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

11.1.2 Control in the Cascade Mode (CTL = CAS) In the cascade mode, two loops are connected in series (cascade) to conduct cascade control. When the cascade mode is selected, the functions are configured as shown in the figure below. Changing parameters (in blue bold characters) shown in the figure enables the required functions to be configured. For parameters: see “List of Parameters” in the YS1500 Indicating Controller/YS1700



1-24IM

01B08B

02-02EN

ON

MV key

ON

1

SV2PV2

+

–

+

0123E.ai

(CMOD1=CAS)

LOOP 1 Display “C” mode key







(*1)


Measurement input 1X1


Feedforward input/output tracking input

X4

(*1) Output tracking input

X6


CLC1


PLC1


PLC2

Input filterCLG1

Input filterPLG2

Input filterPLG1

Input filterFLG

Input filterTLG




CBO1


SV key

PV1 display

SV1 display

LOOP 1 Display “A” mode key


ParameterPFKEY=STC Deviation alarm

DL1

Control elements1CNT1,ALG1

Limiters MH1,ML1


VL1

Self-tuningSTC

Closed

Open

SV key

ClosedDIn=CLOSEOpen

DIn=OPEN





(*1)

DO1Loop 1 alarm

output (Parameter

DO1F = 1-ALM)

DO2Loop 2 alarm

output (Parameter

DO2F = 2-ALM)

DO3O/C status

output (Parameter

DO3F = O/C)

DO4C/A, M status

output (Parameter

DO4F = CAS)

DO5C, A/M status

output (Parameter

DO5F = CASAUT)


Y2MV output 2




(*1)



TRK1

LCD backlight


Control element 2CNT2,ALG2

Preset MVPMV1

Deviation alarmDL2


VL2

Internal cascade O/C switching (Note 1)DInF=E-O/C

DI1=OPEN

DI1=CLOSE

DI1=OPEN

DI1=CLOSE

“M” mode key on LOOP 1 or LOOP 2 Display

(n=1, 7, 8, 9, 10)

Note 1: One of them can be selected. Moreover, changing DI/DO function assignment enables multiple contacts to be used.

Output preset MV and MAN (Note 1)DInF=TR-MPMVSwitching by pressing “C” (Note 1)DInF=TR-CASSwitching by pressing “A” (Note 1)DInF=TR-AUTSwitching by pressing “M” (Note 1) DInF=TR-MAN



Backlight OFF (Note 1)DInF=LCD-OFF

MV display

DInF,DIn

CIN1

CSR1

OFF

CSW1ON

OFF

PSR1ON

OFF

FX1ON

OFF

FIN

FSWON

OFF

FON

ON

OFF

PSR2ON

OFF

FX2

OFF

SV

FF1

PV1

–

+


PF

< >

PF key operation

For YS1500-0/YS1700-0, output tracking input ismade from analog input (X4).

Cascade Mode Function Block Diagram (for YS1700)


ode (CTL)

1-25IM

01B08B

02-02EN

Control Function 1

ON

MV key

ON

1

SV2PV2

+

–

+

0123E.ai

(CMOD1=CAS)

LOOP 1 Display “C” mode key







(*1)




Feedforward input/output tracking input

X4


X6


CLC1


PLC1


PLC2

Input filterCLG1

Input filterPLG2

Input filterPLG1

Input filterFLG

Input filterTLG




CBO1


SV key

PV1 display

SV1 display

LOOP 1 Display “A” mode key


ParameterPFKEY=STC Deviation alarm

DL1

Control elements1CNT1,ALG1

Limiters MH1,ML1


VL1

Self-tuningSTC

Closed

Open

SV key

ClosedDIn=CLOSEOpen

DIn=OPEN





(*1)

DO1Loop 1 alarm

output (Parameter

DO1F = 1-ALM)

DO2Loop 2 alarm

output (Parameter

DO2F = 2-ALM)

DO3O/C status

output (Parameter

DO3F = O/C)

DO4C/A, M status

output (Parameter

DO4F = CAS)

DO5C, A/M status

output (Parameter

DO5F = CASAUT)


Y2MV output 2




(*1)



TRK1

LCD backlight


Control element 2CNT2,ALG2

Preset MVPMV1

Deviation alarmDL2


VL2

Internal cascade O/C switching (Note 1)DInF=E-O/C

DI1=OPEN

DI1=CLOSE

DI1=OPEN

DI1=CLOSE


(n=1, 7, 8, 9, 10)


Output preset MV and MAN (Note 1)DInF=TR-MPMVSwitching by pressing “C” (Note 1)DInF=TR-CASSwitching by pressing “A” (Note 1)DInF=TR-AUTSwitching by pressing “M” (Note 1) DInF=TR-MAN



Backlight OFF (Note 1)DInF=LCD-OFF

MV display

DInF,DIn

CIN1

CSR1

OFF

CSW1ON

OFF

PSR1ON

OFF

FX1ON

OFF

FIN

FSWON

OFF

FON

ON

OFF

PSR2ON

OFF

FX2

OFF

SV

FF1

PV1

–

+


PF

< >

PF key operation

For YS1500-0/YS1700-0, output tracking input ismade from analog input (X4).

Cascade Mode Function Block Diagram (for YS1700)


ode (CTL)

1-26 IM 01B08B02-02EN

n Cascade Control Function

Control elements Control type: Standard PID control and sample-and-hold PI control Control operation formulas: The formula can be selected from the following for loops 1 and 2.


For control types and control operation formulas: see 1.2, Selecting the Control Method (Selecting Control Type CNT and Control Operation Formula ALG), in this manual.

Main parameter functions Main Functions Reference Destination



10-segment line 2.1.3, 10-segment Linearizer Function






Other functions Main Functions Reference Destination






1-27IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function


Setting Display

Engineering Display

0123-01E.ai


Setting Details

To perform automatic control/manual control only, set CMOD1 = − (no setting). Operations described in “(1) Performing control using YS1000 only” apply.



−

Description

The loop 1's operation mode can be switched by pressing the “A” or “M” mode key on the instrument's front panel while the LOOP 1 Display is shown.

Loop 1 automatic control (A) if the “A” mode key is pressed Loop 1 manual control (M) or loop 2 manual control (M) (CLOSE) if the “M” mode key

is pressed

The loop 2's operation mode can be switched among the following three types by pressing the “C,” “A,” or “M” mode key on the instrument's front panel while the LOOP 2 Display is shown.

Loop 2 automatic control (A) (OPEN) if the “A” mode key is pressed Loop 1 manual control (M) or loop 2 manual control (M) (OPEN) if the “M” mode key is

pressed Loop 2 cascade control (CLOSE) if the “C” mode key is pressed

Switching to each operation mode can be achieved based on digital input (DI), through communication, or using user programs in addition to the keys on the instrument's front panel.




For switching using user programs: see YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700 Programmable. Function User's Manual.


1-28 IM 01B08B02-02EN

What are “OPEN” and “CLOSE” CLOSE: Condition in which loop 1's output variable is treated as the setpoint (SV2) of loop 2. It is the condition in which the (internal) cascade is closed. OPEN: Condition in which loop 2's setpoint (SV2) is set using a key or through communication. It is the condition in which the (internal) cascade is open.

Meaning of SymbolsThe following shows the operation mode symbols and their meanings:

Symbol Meaning



(OPEN) (Internal) Cascade open (OPEN) condition

(CLOSE) (Internal) Cascade closed (CLOSE) condition


1-29IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1(1) Performing control using YS1000 only

Only internally cascaded automatic control (A) or manual control (M) is available. For the loop 1, operation does not change even if the “C” mode key on the instrument's front panel is pressed. For the loop 2, the “C,” “A,” and “M” mode keys on the instrument's front panel enable switching between open/closed, automatic, and manual control.



X1

Setpoint (SV1)

Control element 1CNT1

(A1)

(M1)

(A2)

(C2)

(M2)

Y1

X3


–

–

Measurement input 1



(A1)/(A2)/(C2)(M1)/(M2)

Manipulated output variable (MV)

(C2)(CLOSE)

(A2)(OPEN)

Setpoint (SV2)

LOOP 1 Display

LOOP 2 Display

Same display as that of loop 1

[CLOSE] is displayed if loop 2 is in cascade control. [OPEN] is displayed if loop 2 is in automatic control. [OPEN] is displayed if manual control is selected in loop 2. [CLOSE] is displayed if manual control is selected in loop 1.

Measurement input 2




1-30 IM 01B08B02-02EN

(C)

(C)CLOSE

(A)OPEN

(M)CLOSE

(M)OPEN

(A) (M)

A1-C2(CLOSE)

A1-A2(OPEN)

M1-M2(CLOSE)

M1-M2(OPEN)

A1-A2(CLOSE)

MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS2)

CAS(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

AUT(LS2)

MAN(LS2)

* The heavy lines indicate that the OPEN/CLOSE status has changed. * Operation does not change even if the “C” mode key on the LOOP 1 Display is pressed.

C2: (Internal) Cascade control, An: Automatic control, Mn: Manual control (n: “1” denotes loop 1, while “2” means loop 2.)

CLOSE/OPEN: Cascade closed/cascade open It is displayed on the control status display section.

: Press this key (the number represents the loop concerned).

MAN (LS1): Sends a communication command.

*1: Transmission of “CAS,” “DDC,” or “SPC” to the LS1 register using a communication command is invalid.

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS1)(LS1)*1

CAS(LS2)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)(LS1)*1

(LS1)*1CAS(LS2)MAN(LS1)

Loop 1 key lamp

Loop 2 key lamp

(LS1)*1 MAN(LS1)CAS(LS2) MAN(LS2)

0125E.ai

M2

M1

A1

C2

C2

C2

A1A2

A2

M2

M1

M1

A1

A1

A2

A2

M1

M2

C1

C2

M1

M2



1-31IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function


Operation Mode Instrument's Front Panel Lamps Control Status Display Sections of LOOP 1 and 2 or

METER 1 and 2 Displays Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 1 Loop 2

Manual control (M1)

Manual control (M2) “M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights.

[OPEN] is displayed (if manual control is selected in loop 2) [CLOSE] is displayed (in A1-C2 mode, if manual control is selected in loop 1)

Automatic control (A1)

(Internal) Cascade control (C2) “A” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [CLOSE] is displayed.

Automatic control (A2) “A” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [OPEN] is displayed.

Setpoints and Control Status in Each Operation Mode

Operation Mode Setpoint (SV1, SV2) Control Status

Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 1 (SV1) Loop 2 (SV2)

Manual control (M1)

Manual control (M2)


Set using a key or through communication (*2) (if internal cascade is in open status) Manual

Loop 2's process variable is treated as a setpoint (SV2). (if internal cascade is in close status)

Manual


(Internal) Cascade control (C2) Set using a key or

through communication (*1)

Loop 1's output variable is treated as a setpoint (SV2).

(Internal) Cascade

Automatic control (A2) Set using a key or through communication (*2) Automatic

*1: Set to communication register SV1 *2: Set to communication register SV2 For setting through communication: see YS1000 Series Communication Interface User's

Manual.


1-32 IM 01B08B02-02EN


Setting Display

Engineering Display

0126E.ai


Setting Details

To perform automatic control, manual control, or cascade setting automatic control, set CMOD1 = CAS or CMP. Any of operations (1) to (3) is performed according to the setting.(1) Operation is controlled based on an external setpoint from analog input. (2) Operation is controlled based on an external setpoint through communication, or

backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication. (3) Operation is controlled based on an external manipulated output variable through

communication, or backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication.



−

BMOD1 Backup mode 1


Description

The loop 1's operation mode can be switched among the following three types by pressing the “C,” “A,” or “M” mode key on the instrument's front panel while the LOOP 1 Display is shown.

Loop 1 automatic control (A) if the “A” mode key is pressed. Loop 1 manual control or loop 2 manual control (M) (CLOSE) if the “M” mode key is

pressed. Loop 1 cascade setting automatic control (C) if the “C” mode key is pressed.

The loop 2's operation mode can be similarly switched among the following three types by pressing the “C,” “A,” or “M” mode key on the instrument's front panel while the LOOP 2 Display is shown.

Loop 2 automatic control (A) (OPEN) if the “A” mode key is pressed. Loop 1 manual control or loop 2 manual control (M) (OPEN) if the “M” mode key is

pressed. Loop 2 cascade control (CLOSE) if the “C” mode key is pressed.


1-33IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1Switching to each operation mode can be achieved based on digital input (DI), through communication, or using user programs in addition to the keys on the instrument's front panel.





What are “OPEN” and “CLOSE” CLOSE: Condition in which the loop 1's output variable is treated as the setpoint (SV2) of loop 2. It is the condition in which the (internal) cascade is closed. OPEN: Condition in which the loop 2's setpoint (SV2) is set using a key or through communication. It is the condition in which the (internal) cascade is open.


1-34 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Cascade setting automatic control (C mode) Cascade setting automatic control (C) is a mode in which control is performed based on an external setpoint (SV) (through communication or from analog input). Cascade setting automatic control (C), requiring the use of the “C” mode key, performs different operations depending on the setting of the C-mode 1 (CMOD1) parameter. There is an analog cascade setting mode (CAS) and a computer cascade setting mode (CMP) in cascade setting automatic control (C). Moreover, the computer cascade setting mode (CMP) has SPC and DDC modes.

Cascade Mode (Parameter CMOD1)

Communication Mode




DDC mode (*)



Write “SPC” to LS1 to use cascade setting automatic control in the SPC mode or “DDC” to use it in the DDC mode.


Backup mode The backup mode is available in the computer cascade setting mode (CMOD1 = CMP). If writing in watchdog timer from the high-level computer is lost during the period set by YS1000's communication watchdog timer, the YS1000 determines that the computer has failed in communication. The YS1000 then disconnects from it and automatically changes the operation mode. This operating status is called “backup mode” and there are the following two types of backup mode. A backup mode is set using the backup mode 1 (BMOD1) engineering parameter.

Automatic operation backup mode (BUA): Operation transitions from cascade setting automatic control (C) to the automatic

operation backup mode (BUA) equivalent to automatic control (A). In this mode, the “C” lamp is lit and the “A” lamp blinks on the instrument's front panel. If the high-level computer recovers communication in this condition, operation changes to cascade setting automatic control (C).

Manual operation backup mode (BUM): Operation transitions from cascade setting automatic control (C) to manual operation

backup mode (BUM) equivalent to manual control (M). In this mode, the “C” lamp is lit and the “M” lamp blinks on the instrument's front panel. If the high-level computer recovers communication in this condition, operation changes to cascade setting automatic control (C).


1-35IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1Meaning of Symbols The following shows the operation mode symbols and their meanings:

Symbol Meaning



(OPEN) (Internal) Cascade open status

(CLOSE) (Internal) Cascade closed status

(C) (CAS) Cascade setting automatic control (C) – analog cascade setting mode (CAS) status

(C) (CMP) (SPC) Cascade setting automatic control (C) – computer cascade setting mode (CMP) – cascade backup mode (SPC) status based on an external setpoint

(C) (CMP) (DDC)Cascade setting automatic control (C) – computer cascade setting mode (CMP) – cascade backup mode (DDC) status based on external manipulated output variable

(BUM)

Manual operation backup status due to a communication failure by the high-level computer (Same operation as manual control is performed and control automatically returns to cascade setting automatic control if communication failure is cleared.)

(BUA)

Automatic operation backup status due to a communication failure by the high-level computer (Same operation as automatic control is performed and control automatically returns to cascade setting automatic control if communication failure is cleared.)


1-36 IM 01B08B02-02EN

(1) Performing control based on an external setpoint from analog input

YS1000 accepts an external setpoint from the analog input (terminal X2) to perform cascade control.



X1

Setpoint (SV1)


(A1)

(C1)

(C1)(M1)

(A1)/(M1)

(A2)

(C2)

(M2)

Y1

X3

Control element 2 CNT2

–

–

Measurement input 1



(A1)/(A2)/(C1)/(C2)(M1)/(M2)


(C2)(CLOSE)

(C2)(OPEN)

Setpoint (SV2)

LOOP 1 Display

LOOP 2 Display


[CAS] is displayed in cascade control.

An analog cascade settingvalue is displayed.

[CLOSE] is displayed if loop 2 is in cascade control. [OPEN] is displayed if loop 2 is in automatic control.[OPEN] is displayed if manual control is selected in loop 2.[CLOSE] is displayed if manual control is selected in loop 1.

h

Measurement input 2

Manipulated output

X2

Cascade setting input

0127E.ai



1-37IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1(C)

(C)CLOSE

(A)OPEN

(M)CLOSE

(M)OPEN

(A) (M)

A1-A2(CLOSE)

A1-C2(CLOSE)

C1-C2(CLOSE)

A1-A2(OPEN)

C1-A2(OPEN)

M1-M2(CLOSE)

M1-M2(OPEN)

MAN(LS2)

MAN(LS1)

AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

AUT(LS1)

AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

AUT(LS2)

MAN(LS2)

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

CAS(LS1)*1 MAN(LS1)CAS(LS2) MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)CAS(LS2)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

CAS(LS1) *1CAS(LS2)MAN(LS1)

CAS(LS1) *1AUT(LS2)

CAS(LS1) *1CAS(LS2)

CAS(LS1) *1

CAS(LS1) *1

CAS(LS2) CAS(LS2)

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

0128E.ai

* Heavy lines indicate that the OPEN/CLOSE status has been changed.

C1: Cascade setting automatic control, C2: (Internal) Cascade control An: Automatic control, Mn: Manual control

(n: “1” denotes loop 1, while “2” means loop 2.)CLOSE/OPEN: Cascade closed/cascade open

It is displayed on the control status display section.



*1: Transmission of “DDC” or “SPC” to the LS1 register using a communication command is invalid.

Loop 1 key lamp

Loop 2 key lamp

A1

A1

A1

A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

A2

A2

C1

C1

C1

C1

C2

C2

C2

C2

M2

M2

M2

M1

M1

M1

C1 C2

M1

M1

M2

A2

M2

C1

C2

M1

M2

M1



1-38 IM 01B08B02-02EN




Manual control (M1)


[OPEN] is displayed (if manual control is selected in loop 2) (*1) [CLOSE] is displayed (in C1-C2 mode or A1-C2 mode, if manual control is selected in loop 1) (*1)


(Internal) Cascade control (C2)

“A” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [CLOSE] is displayed. (*1)

Automatic control (A2) “A” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [OPEN] is displayed. (*1)

Cascade setting automatic control (C1)


“C” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [CAS] and [CLOSE] are displayed. (*1)

Automatic control (A2) “C” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [CAS] and [OPEN] is displayed. (*1)



Operation Mode Setpoint (SV1, SV2) Control Status Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 1 (SV1) Loop 2 (SV2)

Manual control (M1)

Manual control (M2)



Loop 2's process variable is treated as setpoint (SV2). (if internal cascade is in close status)

Manual


(Internal) Cascade control (C2) Set using a key or through

communication (*1)

Loop 1's output variable is treated as setpoint (SV2). (Internal) Cascade




External setpoint from analog input (terminal X2) Loop 1's output variable is treated as setpoint (SV2). (Internal)

Cascade


External setpoint from analog input (terminal X2) Set using a key or through communication (*2) Automatic


Manual.


1-39IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1

Intentionally blank


1-40 IM 01B08B02-02EN

(2) Performing control based on an external setpoint through communication/backup operation if the high-level computer fails in communication

YS1000 accepts the loop 1's external setpoint through communication to perform cascade control. If the high-level computer fails in communication, the YS1000 backs up operation. If the computer recovers communication, control returns to the original condition.







1-41IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1X1

Setpoint (SV1)


(A1)

(C1)

(C1)(M1)

(A1)/(C1)(BUA)/(C1)(BUM)

(A2)

(C2)

(M2)

Y1

X3


–

–

Measurement input 1



(A1)/(A2)/(C1)/(C2)/(C1)(BUA)

(M1)/(M2)/(C1)(BUM)


(C2)(CLOSE)

(A2)(OPEN)

Setpoint (SV2)

LOOP 1 Display

LOOP 2 Display


[SPC] is displayed in cascade control.


m 3 / h1 0 0. 0 0

Measurement input 2

Manipulated output


Communication parameter SV1

0129E.ai



1-42IM

01B08B

02-02EN

Communication failedCommunication recovered



(C)

(C)CLOSE

(C)CLOSE

(A)OPEN

(M)CLOSE

(M)OPEN

(A) (M)

CAS(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

CAS(LS2)SPC(LS1)

*1 AUT(LS2)

SPC(LS1)*1

SPC(LS1)*1

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS2)

C1(SPC)-C2(CLOSE)

SPC(LS1)*1

MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

SPC(LS1)*1

MAN(LS1)

MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)CAS(LS2)

A1-C2(CLOSE)

AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

CAS(LS2)

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

CAS(LS2)MAN(LS1)

MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS2)

A1-A2(OPEN)

M1-M2(CLOSE)

M1-M2(OPEN)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

C1(SPC)-A2(OPEN)

A1-A2(CLOSE)

For use in the backup mode

(A)OPEN

(A)OPEN


(BUA)

C1(BUA)-A2(OPEN)

C1(BUM)-A2(OPEN)

(BUM)

(BUA)

C1(BUA)-C2(CLOSE)

C1(BUM)-C2(CLOSE)

(BUM)

SPC(LS1)*1 MAN(LS1)CAS(LS2) MAN(LS2)

Loop 1 key lamp

Loop 2 key lamp

Setpoint

Setpoint

Loop 2 key lamp

Loop 2 key lamp

Setpoint

Loop 2 key lamp

0130E.ai





: Press this key (the number represents the loop concerned). MAN (LS1): Sends a communication command.

*1: Transmission of “CAS” to the LS1 register using a communication command is invalid.

If writing in watchdog timer from the high-level computer is lost during the period set by YS1000’s communication watchdog timer, the YS1000 determines that the computer has failed in communication. The YS1000 then disconnects from it and automatically changes the operation mode. If communication fails, the operation mode changes to (BUM) or (BUA). If communication recovers, it returns to (C) (CMP) (SPC).

Switching from the BUA or BUM mode to another mode can be made using a key or through communication, but the reverse is not possible. In the BUM mode, operation does not change even if the “C” mode key is pressed on loop 2’s Operation Display.

Switching from the BUA or BUM mode to another mode can be accomplished using a key or through communication, but the reverse is not possible.

A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

C1

C1

C1

C1

C2

C2

A1

C2

C2

M2

M2

M1

M1

M1

A2

M2

M1

M2

A1

A1

A2

A2

M2

M1

C1 C2

M1

C1

C2

M1

M2

*Not available inthe BUM mode.



ode (CTL)

1-43IM

01B08B

02-02EN

Control Function 1




(C)

(C)CLOSE

(C)CLOSE

(A)OPEN

(M)CLOSE

(M)OPEN

(A) (M)

CAS(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

CAS(LS2)SPC(LS1)

*1 AUT(LS2)

SPC(LS1)*1

SPC(LS1)*1

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS2)

C1(SPC)-C2(CLOSE)

SPC(LS1)*1

MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

SPC(LS1)*1

MAN(LS1)

MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)CAS(LS2)

A1-C2(CLOSE)

AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

CAS(LS2)

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

CAS(LS2)MAN(LS1)

MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS2)

A1-A2(OPEN)

M1-M2(CLOSE)

M1-M2(OPEN)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

C1(SPC)-A2(OPEN)

A1-A2(CLOSE)


(A)OPEN

(A)OPEN


(BUA)

C1(BUA)-A2(OPEN)

C1(BUM)-A2(OPEN)

(BUM)

(BUA)

C1(BUA)-C2(CLOSE)

C1(BUM)-C2(CLOSE)

(BUM)


Loop 1 key lamp

Loop 2 key lamp

Setpoint

Setpoint

Loop 2 key lamp

Loop 2 key lamp

Setpoint

Loop 2 key lamp

0130E.ai







If writing in watchdog timer from the high-level computer is lost during the period set by YS1000’s communication watchdog timer, the YS1000 determines that the computer has failed in communication. The YS1000 then disconnects from it and automatically changes the operation mode. If communication fails, the operation mode changes to (BUM) or (BUA). If communication recovers, it returns to (C) (CMP) (SPC).



A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

C1

C1

C1

C1

C2

C2

A1

C2

C2

M2

M2

M1

M1

M1

A2

M2

M1

M2

A1

A1

A2

A2

M2

M1

C1 C2

M1

C1

C2

M1

M2




ode (CTL)

1-44 IM 01B08B02-02EN


Operation Mode Instrument's Front Panel Lamps Control Status Display Sections of LOOP 1 and 2 or METER 1 and 2 Displays Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 1 Loop 2

Manual control (M1) Manual control (M2) “M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights.

[OPEN] is displayed (if manual control is selected in loop 2) [CLOSE] is displayed (in C1(SPC)-C2 mode or A1-C2 mode, if manual control is selected in loop 1)



“A” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [CLOSE] is displayed.


Cascade setting automatic control (C1) (SPC)


“C” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [SPC] and [CLOSE] are displayed.

Automatic control (A2) “C” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [SPC] and [OPEN] are displayed.

Cascade setting automatic control (C1) (BUA)


“C” lamp lights and “A” lamp blinks.

“C” lamp lights. [BUA] and [CLOSE] are displayed.



“A” lamp lights. [BUA] and [OPEN] are displayed.

Cascade setting automatic control (C1) (BUM)


“C” lamp lights and “M” lamp blinks.


[BUM] and [CLOSE] are displayed.



“A” lamp lights and “M” lamp blinks.

[BUM] and [OPEN] are displayed.


Operation Mode Setpoint (SV1, SV2) Control Status Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 1 (SV1) Loop 1 (SV1)

Manual control (M1) Manual control (M2)



Loop 2's process variable is treated as setpoint (SV2). (if internal cascade is in close status) Manual





Automatic control (A2) Set using a key or through communication (*2) Automatic Cascade setting automatic control (C1) (SPC)

(Internal) Cascade control (C2) Set through

communication (*1)




(Internal) Cascade control (C2) Set using a

key or through communication (*1)






Loop 2's process variable is treated as setpoint (SV2). Manual

Automatic control (A2) Set using a key or through communication (*2) Manual


Manual.


1-45IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1

Intentionally blank


1-46 IM 01B08B02-02EN

(3) Performing control based on an external manipulated output variable through communication, or backup operation if the high-level computer fails in communication

YS1000 accepts a manipulated output variable through communication to perform cascade control. If the high-level computer fails in communication, the YS1000 backs up operation. If the computer recovers communication, control returns to the original condition.







1-47IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1X1

Setpoint (SV1)

(A1)

(C1)

(M1)

(A2)

(C2)

(M2)

Y1

X3

–

–

Measurement input 1




(C2)(CLOSE)

(A2)(OPEN)

Setpoint (SV2)

LOOP 1 Display

LOOP 2 Display


Measurement input 2

Manipulated output

(A1)/(A2)/(C1)(BUA)/(C2)

(M1)/(M2)/(C1)(BUM)

(C1)(DDC)


Communication parameter MV1


Control element 2 CNT2

[DDC] is displayed in cascade control.


0131E.ai



1-48IM

01B08B

02-02EN


(BUA) (BUM)

(C)CLS

(C) (A) (M)

A1-C2(CLOSE)

A1-A2(OPEN)

M1-M2(CLOSE)

M1-M2(OPEN)

AUT(LS1)

AUT(LS2)

DDC(LS1)*1

AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS2)

CAS(LS2)

C1(DDC)-A2(OPEN)

DDC(LS1)*1

DDC(LS1)*1

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

MAN(LS2)

DDC(LS1)*1

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

CAS(LS2)MAN(LS1)

AUT(LS2)

DDC(LS1)*1

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

CAS(LS2)

DDC(LS1)*1

C1(DDC)-C2(CLOSE)

(C)CLOSE

(A)OPEN

(M)CLOSE

(M)OPEN

AUT(LS1)CAS(LS2)

AUT(LS1) MAN(LS2)

MAN(LS1)

CAS(LS2)

MAN(LS2)

C1(BUA)-C2(CLOSE)

C1(BUM)-C2(CLOSE)

MAN(LS1)CAS(LS2) MAN(LS2)




(A)OPEN

(A)OPEN

(BUA)

C1(BUA)-A2(OPEN)

C1(BUM)-A2(OPEN)

(BUM)

Setpoint

Loop 2 key lamp

Setpoint

Loop 2 key lamp


Loop 1 key lamp

Loop 2 key lamp


Setpoint

Loop 2 key lamp

If writing in watchdog timer from the high-level computer is lost during the period set by YS1000’s communication watchdog timer, the YS1000 determines that the computer has failed in communication. The YS1000 then disconnects from it and automatically changes the operation mode. If communication fails, the operation mode changes to (BUM) or (BUA). If communication recovers, it returns to (C) (CMP) (DDC).

Switching from the BUA or BUM mode to another mode can be made using a key or through communication, but the reverse is not possible.

A1-A2(CLOSE)

0132E.ai







A1

A1

A1

A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

A2

A2

C1

C1

C1

C2

C2

C2

C1 C2

M2

M2

M2

M1

M1

M1

M1

A2

M2

M1

M2

C1

C2

M1

M2

M1


C1

C2



ode (CTL)

1-49IM

01B08B

02-02EN

Control Function 1


(BUA) (BUM)

(C)CLS

(C) (A) (M)

A1-C2(CLOSE)

A1-A2(OPEN)

M1-M2(CLOSE)

M1-M2(OPEN)

AUT(LS1)

AUT(LS2)

DDC(LS1)*1

AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS2)

CAS(LS2)

C1(DDC)-A2(OPEN)

DDC(LS1)*1

DDC(LS1)*1

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

MAN(LS2)

DDC(LS1)*1

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

CAS(LS2)MAN(LS1)

AUT(LS2)

DDC(LS1)*1

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

CAS(LS2)

DDC(LS1)*1

C1(DDC)-C2(CLOSE)

(C)CLOSE

(A)OPEN

(M)CLOSE

(M)OPEN

AUT(LS1)CAS(LS2)

AUT(LS1) MAN(LS2)

MAN(LS1)

CAS(LS2)

MAN(LS2)

C1(BUA)-C2(CLOSE)

C1(BUM)-C2(CLOSE)





(A)OPEN

(A)OPEN

(BUA)

C1(BUA)-A2(OPEN)

C1(BUM)-A2(OPEN)

(BUM)

Setpoint

Loop 2 key lamp

Setpoint

Loop 2 key lamp


Loop 1 key lamp

Loop 2 key lamp


Setpoint

Loop 2 key lamp

If writing in watchdog timer from the high-level computer is lost during the period set by YS1000’s communication watchdog timer, the YS1000 determines that the computer has failed in communication. The YS1000 then disconnects from it and automatically changes the operation mode. If communication fails, the operation mode changes to (BUM) or (BUA). If communication recovers, it returns to (C) (CMP) (DDC).

Switching from the BUA or BUM mode to another mode can be made using a key or through communication, but the reverse is not possible.

A1-A2(CLOSE)

0132E.ai







A1

A1

A1

A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

A2

A2

C1

C1

C1

C2

C2

C2

C1 C2

M2

M2

M2

M1

M1

M1

M1

A2

M2

M1

M2

C1

C2

M1

M2

M1


C1

C2



ode (CTL)

1-50 IM 01B08B02-02EN



Manual control (M1)


[OPEN] is displayed (if manual control is selected in loop 2) [CLOSE] is displayed (in C1(DDC)-C2 mode or A1-C2 mode, if manual control is selected in loop 1)



“A” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [CLOSE] is displayed.


Cascade setting automatic control (C1) (DDC)


“C” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [DDC] and [CLOSE] are displayed.

Automatic control (A2) “C” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [DDC] and [OPEN] are displayed.




“C” lamp lights. [BUA] and [CLOSE] are displayed.



“A” lamp lights. [BUA] and [OPEN] are displayed.





[BUM] and [CLOSE] are displayed.




[BUM] and [OPEN] are displayed.


Operation Mode Setpoint (SV1, SV2) Control Status


Manual control (M1)

Manual control (M2)



Loop 2's process variable is treated as setpoint (SV2). (if internal cascade is in close status)

Manual







(Internal) Cascade control (C2) Set through

communication (*1)

Loop 1's output variable is treated as setpoint (SV2).

Output operation via communication

Automatic control (A2) Set using a key or through communication (*2) Output operation via

communication









Loop 2's process variable is treated as setpoint (SV2). Manual

Automatic control (A2) Set using a key or through communication (*2) Manual


Manual.


1-51IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

11.1.3 Control in the Selector Mode (CTL = SELECT) The selector mode consists of the operation results obtained by two (loop 1 and loop 2) control operation formulas and autoselector (ATSEL). The autoselector can be selected using auto high selector (HIGH) or auto low selector (LOW) or by manual operation. When the selector mode is selected, the functions are configured as shown in the figure below. Changing parameters (in blue bold characters) shown in the figure enables the required functions to be configured. For parameters: see “List of Parameters” in the YS1500 Indicating Controller/YS1700



1-52IM

01B08B

02-02EN

MV key

–

0133E.ai







(*1)

Cascade setting input 1 X2

Measurement input 1 X1

Cascade setting input 2/output tracking input

X4Measurement input 2

X3


X6

For YS1500-0/YS1700-0, output tracking input is made from analog input 4(X4).


CLC1


PLC1


CLC2


PLC2

Input filterCLG1

Input filterPLG1

Input filterCLG2

Input filterTLG

Input filterPLG2

Ratio and biasCGN1(CIN1+CBI1)+

CBO1


CBO2



SV key SV keyPV1 display

SV1 display

PV2 display

SV2 display

Deviation alarmDL1

Deviation alarmDL2Control

elements 1CNT1,ALG1


VL1


VL2

Self-tuningSTC Control element 2

CNT1,ALG1

ParameterPFKEY=STC

STC start (Note 1) DInF=E-STC







(*1)

DO1Loop 1 alarm

output (Parameter

DO1F = 1-ALM)

DO2Loop 2 alarm

output (Parameter

DO2F = 2-ALM)

DO3R/L status

output (Parameter

DO3F = L/R)

DO4C/A, M status

output (Parameter

DO4F = CAS)

DO5C, A/M status

output (Parameter

DO5F =CASAUT)


Y2MV output 2


Y4PV output

(1–5 V) (Parameter Y4S = PV1)

(*1)

Y3SV output

(1–5 V) (Parameter Y3S = SV1)

LCD backlight

Selector selection (Note 1)

DInF=E-SEL

Switching by pressing “C” (Note 1)DInF=TR-CAS

Switching by pressing “A” (Note 1)DInF=TR-AUT

Switching by pressing “M” (Note 1) DInF=TR-MAN

Tracking switching (Note 1) DInF=E-TRK


DInF=TR-MPMV



DInF, DIn(n=1, 7, 8, 9, 10)

MV display

TRK1

Preset MV PMV1

Output limiters MH1,ML1

DI1=OPEN

DI1=CLOSE

DI1=OPEN


DI1=CLOSE

21

DI1=CLOSE→AUT

SSW

AutoselectorATSEL

DI1=OPEN→1

OFF

SV1PV1

SV2PV2

OFF

L(OPEN) R(CLOSE)

(CMOD1=CAS)

–

+

+

LOOP 1 Display “C” mode key LOOP 1 Display

“A” mode key

Selector’s secondary SV L/R switching (Note 1)

DInF=E-L/R

CIN1

CSR1ON

OFF

CSW1ON

PSR1ON

OFF

FX1ON

OFF

PSR2ON

OFF

FX2ON

OFF

CIN2

CSR2ON

OFF

CSW2ON

PF

Selector (Note 1)DInF=E-LPSELDI open: Output the computation result of Loop 2DI close: Output the computation result of Loop 1

Selector Mode Function Block Diagram (for YS1700)


ode (CTL)

1-53IM

01B08B

02-02EN

Control Function 1

MV key

–

0133E.ai







(*1)

Cascade setting input 1 X2

Measurement input 1 X1

Cascade setting input 2/output tracking input

X4Measurement input 2

X3


X6

For YS1500-0/YS1700-0, output tracking input is made from analog input 4(X4).


CLC1


PLC1


CLC2


PLC2

Input filterCLG1

Input filterPLG1

Input filterCLG2

Input filterTLG

Input filterPLG2


CBO1


CBO2



SV key SV keyPV1 display

SV1 display

PV2 display

SV2 display

Deviation alarmDL1

Deviation alarmDL2Control

elements 1CNT1,ALG1


VL1


VL2

Self-tuningSTC Control element 2

CNT1,ALG1

ParameterPFKEY=STC

STC start (Note 1) DInF=E-STC







(*1)

DO1Loop 1 alarm

output (Parameter

DO1F = 1-ALM)

DO2Loop 2 alarm

output (Parameter

DO2F = 2-ALM)

DO3R/L status

output (Parameter

DO3F = L/R)

DO4C/A, M status

output (Parameter

DO4F = CAS)

DO5C, A/M status

output (Parameter

DO5F =CASAUT)


Y2MV output 2


Y4PV output

(1–5 V) (Parameter Y4S = PV1)

(*1)

Y3SV output

(1–5 V) (Parameter Y3S = SV1)

LCD backlight

Selector selection (Note 1)

DInF=E-SEL

Switching by pressing “C” (Note 1)DInF=TR-CAS

Switching by pressing “A” (Note 1)DInF=TR-AUT

Switching by pressing “M” (Note 1) DInF=TR-MAN

Tracking switching (Note 1) DInF=E-TRK


DInF=TR-MPMV



DInF, DIn(n=1, 7, 8, 9, 10)

MV display

TRK1

Preset MV PMV1

Output limiters MH1,ML1

DI1=OPEN

DI1=CLOSE

DI1=OPEN


DI1=CLOSE

21

DI1=CLOSE→AUT

SSW

AutoselectorATSEL

DI1=OPEN→1

OFF

SV1PV1

SV2PV2

OFF

L(OPEN) R(CLOSE)

(CMOD1=CAS)

–

+

+

LOOP 1 Display “C” mode key LOOP 1 Display

“A” mode key

Selector’s secondary SV L/R switching (Note 1)

DInF=E-L/R

CIN1

CSR1ON

OFF

CSW1ON

PSR1ON

OFF

FX1ON

OFF

PSR2ON

OFF

FX2ON

OFF

CIN2

CSR2ON

OFF

CSW2ON

PF

Selector (Note 1)DInF=E-LPSELDI open: Output the computation result of Loop 2DI close: Output the computation result of Loop 1

Selector Mode Function Block Diagram (for YS1700)


ode (CTL)

1-54 IM 01B08B02-02EN

n Selector Control Function

Control elements Control type: Standard PID control Control operation formulas: The formula can be selected from the following for loops 1 and 2:


Selector function: can be selected from autoselector, high selector, and low selector. Manual selection control: The set loop's output variable can be output regardless of the magnitude of the signal. For control types and control operation formulas: see 1.2, Selecting the Control Method (Selecting

Control Type CNT and Control Operation Formula ALG), in this manual.

Main parameter functions Main Functions Reference Destination



10-segment line 2.1.3, 10-Segment Linearizer Function






Other functions Main Functions Reference Destination






1-55IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function


Setting Display

Engineering Display

0134E.ai

Operation Display > SHIFT + keys (to the Tuning Menu Display) > SHIFT + keys (to the Engineering Menu Display) > [CONFIG1] software key (Configuration Display 1) or [CONFIG2] software key (Configuration Display 2)

Tuning Display

0135E.ai

Operation Display > SHIFT + keys (to the Tuning Menu Display) > [PID2] software key (PID Setting Display 2)

Setting Details

To perform automatic control or manual control only, set CMOD1 = − (no setting) or CMOD2 = − (no setting). Operations described in “(1) Performing control using YS1000 only” apply.



− (No setting)


ATSEL Autoselector selection

LOW: Selects a smaller output variable. HIGH: Selects a larger output variable. LOW

SSW Selector control switch

AUT: Automatic selection according to selection of autoselector (ATSEL) 1: Selects loop 1 output. 2: Selects loop 2 output.

AUT


1-56 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Description

The operation modes of loops 1 and 2 can be switched by pressing the “A” or “M” mode key on the instrument's front panel. (The mode of the displayed loop will be changed.)

Automatic control (A) if the “A” mode key is pressed Manual control (M) if the “M” mode key is pressed







Symbol Meaning




1-57IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1(1) Performing control using YS1000 only for both loops 1 and 2

Selector control is performed using only YS1000 for both the loops 1 and 2. Operation does not change for either loop even if the “C” mode key on the instrument's front panel is pressed.




X1

Setpoint (SV1)


(A1)

(M1)

(A2)

(M2)

Y1

X3

–

–

Autoselector selectionATSEL

Measurement input 1



(A1)/(A2)(M1)/(M2)


Setpoint (SV2)

LOOP 1 Display

LOOP 2 Display


[SEL1] is displayed if loop 1 output is selected. [SEL2] is displayed if loop 2 output is selected.

[SV2 – LCL] is displayed.

Measurement input 2

Manipulated output

AUT

1 2(SSW)


0136E.ai



1-58 IM 01B08B02-02EN

A1-A2(SV2-LCL)

* Operation does not change even if the “C” mode key on the LOOP 1 or LOOP 2 Display is pressed.

An: Automatic control, Mn: Manual control (n: “1” denotes loop 1, while “2” means loop 2.) SV2-LCL: Loop 2 is in local.

SV2-LCL is displayed on the control status display section.

(C)

(C)SV2-RMT

(A)SV2-LCL

(M)SV2-RMT

(M)SV2-LCL

(A) (M)

0137E.ai

Loop 1 key lamp

Loop 2 key lamp

*1: Transmission of “CAS,” “DDC,” or “SPC” to the LS1 register using communication commands is invalid.




M1

A1-A2(SV2-LCL)

M1-M2(SV2-LCL)

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

(LS1)*1(LS2)*2AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

(LS1)*1 MAN(LS1)(LS2)*2 MAN(LS2)

Loop 1 key lamp

Loop 2 key lamp

A1

A2

M1

M2

A1A2

M1

M2



1-59IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function



Manual control (M1)

Manual control (M2) “M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL] is displayed.


Automatic control (A1) “A” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL], [SEL1], or [SEL2] is displayed.

Setpoints in Each Operation Mode

Operation Mode Setpoint (SV1, SV2)


Manual control (M1) Manual control (M2) Set using a key or through communication (*1)

Set using a key or through communication (*2) Automatic control (A1) Automatic control (A2)


Manual.

The following table shows an output variable and control status in each operation mode according to the settings of the selector selection switch (SSW) tuning parameter and autoselector selection (ATSEL) engineering parameter. Output Variables and Control Status in Each Operation Mode

Parameter Setpoint Loop 1 (CNT1) Loop 2 (CNT2) Control Status

SSW ATSEL Operation Mode Output Variable Operation

Mode Output Variable Manipulated Output

AUT

LOW

Manual control (M1) Follows up MV. Manual

control (M2) Follows up MV. MV is operated using keys or through communication (manual operation).


Outputs control operation. (Loop 1's output = MV + Kp1 × E1 if not selected)



CNT1 or CNT2, whichever is smaller, is selected.

HIGH


control (M2) Follows up MV. MV is operated using keys or through communication (manual operation).





CNT1 or CNT2, whichever is larger, is selected.

1 –

Manual control (M1)

MV is operated using keys or through communication (*1). (Manual operation)

Manual control (M2) Follows up MV. Follows up MV.


Outputs control operation.

Automatic control (A2) Follows up MV.

CNT1 output is selected regardless of the magnitude of the CNT1 and CNT2 signals.

2 –


control (M2)


Follows up MV.

Automatic control (A1) Follows up MV. Automatic

control (A2) Outputs control operation.

CNT2 output is selected regardless of the magnitude of the CNT1 and CNT2 signals.

MV: Manipulated output, Kpn (n = 1, 2): Proportional gain, En (n = 1, 2): Deviation

*1: Set to communication register MV1 *2: Set to communication register MV1 For setting through communication: see YS1000 Series Communication Interface User's

Manual.


1-60 IM 01B08B02-02EN


Setting Display

Engineering Display

0138E.ai

Operation Display > SHIFT + keys (to the Tuning Menu Display) > SHIFT + keys (to the Engineering Menu Display) > [CONFIG1] software key (Configuration Display 1) or [CONFIG2] software key (Configuration Display 2)

Tuning Display

0139E.ai

Operation Display > SHIFT + keys (to the Tuning Menu Display) > [PID2] software key (PID Setting Display 2)

Setting Details

To perform automatic control, manual control, or cascade setting automatic control, set CMOD1 = CAS or CMP or CMOD2 = CAS or CMP. Any of operations (1) to (7) is performed according to the setting. (1) Loop 1 is controlled by YS1000 only, while loop 2 is controlled based on an external

setpoint from analog input. (2) Loop 1 is controlled based on an external setpoint from analog input, while loop 2 is

controlled by YS1000 only. (3) Both loops 1 and 2 are controlled based on an external setpoint from analog input. (4) Loop 1 is controlled based on an external setpoint through communication (backed up if the

high-level computer fails in communication), while loop 2 is controlled by YS1000 only. (5) Loop 1 is controlled based on an external setpoint through communication (backed

up if the high-level computer fails in communication), while loop 2 is controlled based on an external setpoint from analog input.

(6) Operation is controlled based on an external manipulated output variable through communication (backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication).


1-61IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1(7) Operation is controlled based on an external manipulated output variable through communication (backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication) and controlled based on an external manipulated output variable of loop 2 from analog input.



− (No setting)


BMOD1 Backup mode 1


ATSEL Autoselector selection

LOW: Selects a smaller output variable. HIGH: Selects a larger output variable. LOW

SSWSelector control switch

0 (AUT): Automatic selection according to autoselector selection (ATSEL) 1: Selects loop 1 output. 2: Selects loop 2 output.

AUT

Description

The operation modes of loops 1 and 2 can be switched among the following three types by pressing the “C,” “A,” or “M” mode key on the instrument's front panel. (The mode of the displayed loop will be changed.)

Automatic control (A) if the “A” mode key is pressed Manual control (M) if the “M” mode key is pressed Cascade setting automatic control (C) if the “C” mode key is pressed







1-62 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Cascade setting automatic control (C mode) The loop 1 cascade setting automatic control (C) is an operation mode in which control is performed based on an external setpoint (SV) (through communication or from analog input). There is an analog cascade setting mode (CAS) and a computer cascade setting mode (CMP) in cascade setting automatic control (C). Moreover, the computer cascade setting mode (CMP) has SPC and DDC modes. The loop 1 cascade setting automatic control (C) is set by the C-mode 1 (CMOD1) parameter.

Loop 1 Cascade Mode (Parameter CMOD1) Communication Mode




DDC mode (*)



Write “SPC” to LS1 to use cascade setting automatic control in the SPC mode or “DDC” to use it in the DDC mode.


The loop 2 cascade setting automatic control (C) is an operation mode in which control is performed based on an external setpoint (SV) (from analog input). There is an analog cascade setting mode (CAS) in this cascade setting automatic control (C). The loop 2 cascade setting automatic control (C) is set by the C-mode 2 (CMOD2) parameter. Setting to the analog cascade setting mode (CAS) enables the use of the loop 2 cascade setting automatic control (C).

Loop 2 Cascade Mode (Parameter CMOD2) Cascade setting automatic control (C)

Analog cascade setting mode (CAS)

No setting (−)

If an external setpoint (SV) has been set, [SV2-RMT] will be displayed on the control status display section. In manual control (M), there are two types of control: a condition in which a setpoint (SV) can be externally set and a condition in which it can be set using a key or through communication. The condition YS1000 is in can be identified by [SV2-RMT] displayed on the control status display section.

In the selector mode, the operation mode of the loop 1 and loop 2 cascade setting automatic control (C) differs from the parameter (CMOD1/CMOD2) setting.


1-63IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1Backup mode The backup mode is available in the computer cascade setting mode (CMOD1 = CMP). If writing in watchdog timer from the high-level computer is lost during the period set by YS1000's communication watchdog timer, the YS1000 determines that the computer has failed in communication. The YS1000 then disconnects from it and automatically changes the operation mode. This operating status is called “backup mode” and there are the following two types of backup mode. A backup mode is set using the backup mode 1 (BMOD1) engineering parameter.

Automatic operation backup mode (BUA): Operation transitions from cascade setting automatic control (C) to the automatic

operation backup mode (BUA) equivalent to automatic control (A). In this mode, the “C” lamp is lit and the “A” lamp blinks on the instrument's front panel. If the high-level computer recovers communication in this condition, operation changes to cascade setting automatic control (C).

Manual operation backup mode (BUM): Operation transitions from cascade setting automatic control (C) to manual operation

backup mode (BUM) equivalent to manual control (M). In this mode, the “C” lamp is lit and the “M” lamp blinks on the instrument's front panel. If the high-level computer recovers communication in this condition, operation changes to cascade setting automatic control (C).

What are “REMOTE” and “LOCAL” REMORT (RMT): Condition in which the loop 2's setpoint (SV2) is set by the loop 2's

cascade setting input (X4) in the selector mode. LOCAL (LCL): Condition in which the loop 2's setpoint (SV2) is set by the [ ], [ ]

keys on the instrument's front panel in the selector mode.


Symbol Meaning



(C) (CAS) Loop 1's cascade setting automatic control (C) – analog cascade setting mode (CAS) status

(C) (CMP) (SPC)Loop 1's cascade setting automatic control (C) – computer cascade setting mode (CMP) – cascade backup mode (SPC) status based on an external setpoint

(C) (CMP) (DDC)Loop 1's cascade setting automatic control (C) – computer cascade setting mode (CMP) – cascade backup mode (DDC) status based on external manipulated output variable

(SV2-RMT) Loop 2's cascade setting automatic control (RMT) or manual control. RMT: Remote

(SV2-LCL) Loop 2's automatic control or manual control (LCL). LCL: Local

(BUM)

Manual operation backup status due to a communication failure by the high-level computer (Same operation as manual control is performed and control automatically returns to cascade setting automatic control if communication failure is cleared.)

(BUA)

Automatic operation backup status due to a communication failure by the high-level computer (Same operation as automatic control is performed and control automatically returns to cascade setting automatic control if communication failure is cleared.)


1-64 IM 01B08B02-02EN

(1) Controlling loop 1 using YS1000 only and loop 2 based on an external setpoint from analog input

YS1000 accepts an external setpoint for loop 2 from analog input (terminal X4) to perform selector control.





1-65IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1

X1

Y1

X3


–

–



Setpoint (SV1)


(C2)(REMOTE)

(A2)/(M2)(LOCAL)

(M1)/(M2)

Manipulated output variable

Setpoint (SV2)

LOOP 1 Display

LOOP 2 Display

X4


AUT

1 2(SSW)

(A1)

(M1)

(C2)

(A2)

(M2)

(A1)/(A2)/(C2)

Measurement input 1

Measurement input 2

Loop 2's cascade

setting input

Manipulated output

[SV2-RMT] is displayed if loop 2 is in remote. [SV2-LCL] is displayed if loop 2 is in local.

[SEL1] is displayed if loop 1 output is selected. [SEL2] is displayed if loop 2 output is selected. Nothing appears for manual control.


Loop 2's analog cascade setting input value is displayed.

0140E.ai



1-66 IM 01B08B02-02EN

(C)

(C)SV2-RMT

(A)SV2-LCL

(M)SV2-RMT

(M)SV2-LCL

(A) (M)

A1-A2(SV2-LCL)

* Operation does not change even if the “C” mode key on the LOOP 1 Display is pressed.

0141E.ai

Loop 1 key lamp

Loop 2 key lamp

* Heavy lines indicate that the SV2-LCL/SV2-RMT status has been changed.

An: Automatic control, Mn: Manual control (n: “1” denotes loop 1, while “2” means loop 2.)

SV2-RMT/SV2-LCL: Loop 2 is in remote or local. It is displayed on the control status display section.

*1: Transmission of “CAS,” “DDC,” or “SPC” to LS1 using a communication command is invalid.



A1-C2(SV2-RMT)

A1-A2(SV2-LCL)

M1-M2(SV2-RMT)

M1-M2(SV2-LCL)

MAN(LS2)

MAN(LS1)

AUT(LS2)

CAS(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

AUT(LS2)

MAN(LS2)

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS1)(LS1)*1CAS(LS2)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)(LS1)*1

(LS1)*1CAS(LS2)MAN(LS1)

(LS1)*1 MAN(LS1)CAS(LS2) MAN(LS2)

A1

A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

A2

C2

C2

C2

C2

M2

M2

M1

M1

M1

M1

M1

M2

M2



1-67IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function


Operation Mode Instrument's Front Panel Lamps Control Status Display Sections of LOOP 1 and

2 or METER 1 and 2 Displays Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 1 Loop 2

Manual control (M1) Manual control (M2) “M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights.

[SV2-RMT] is displayed. (in A1-C2 mode, for selection of manual control for loop 1) (*1) [SV2-LCL] is displayed. (for selection of manual control for loop 2) (*1)


Cascade setting automatic control (C2) “A” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [SV2-RMT] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed. (*1)

Automatic control (A2) “A” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] is displayed.



Operation Mode Setpoints (SV1, SV2)


Manual control (M1)

Manual control (M2)


External setpoint from analog input (terminal X4) (in SV2-RMT mode) Set using a key or through communication (*2) (in SV2-LCL mode)


Cascade setting automatic control (C2) Set using a key or through

communication (*1)


Automatic control (A2) Set using a key or through communication (*2)


Manual.


1-68 IM 01B08B02-02EN



SSW ATSEL Operation Mode Output Variable Operation Mode Output Variable Manipulated Output

AUT

LOW





CNT1 or CNT2, whichever is smaller, is selected. Automatic control

(A2)

Manual control (M1) Follows up MV. Manual control

(M2) Follows up MV.

MV is operated using keys or through communication (manual operation).

HIGH





CNT1 or CNT2, whichever is larger, is selected. Automatic control

(A2)


(M2) Follows up MV.


1

– Automatic control (A1)


Cascade setting automatic control (C2) Follows up MV.

CNT1 output is selected regardless of the magnitude of CNT1 and CNT2 signals. Automatic control

(A2)

– Manual control (M1)



2

– Automatic control (A1) Follows up MV.

Cascade setting automatic control (C2) Outputs control

operation.

CNT2 output is selected regardless of the magnitude of CNT1 and CNT2 signals. Automatic control

(A2)

– Manual control (M1) Follows up MV. Manual control

(M2)


Follows up MV.



Manual.


1-69IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1(2) Controlling loop 1 based on an external setpoint from analog input and loop 2 using YS1000 only

YS1000 accepts an external setpoint for loop 1 from analog input (terminal X2) to perform selector control.




X1

Setpoint (SV1)


(A1)

(C1)

(C1)(M1)

(A1)/(M1)

X3

Measurement input 1


Measurement input 2

X2

Loop 1's cascade setting input

LOOP 1 Display

(A2)

(M2)

Y1



(A1)/(A2)/(C1)(M1)/(M2)


Setpoint (SV2) LOOP 2 Display


Manipulated output

AUT

1 2(SSW)


0142E.ai

–

–

[CAS] is displayed if loop 1 is in cascade control.

[SV2-LCL] is displayed if loop 2 is in local.





1-70 IM 01B08B02-02EN

(C)

(C)SV2-RMT

(A)SV2-LCL

(M)SV2-RMT

(M)SV2-LCL

(A) (M)

A1-A2(SV2-LCL)

0143E.ai


Loop 1 key lamp

Loop 2 key lamp

*1: Transmission of “DDC” or “SPC” to LS1 using a communication command is invalid.

*2: Transmission of “CAS” to LS2 using a communication command is invalid.


SV2-LCL: Loop 2 is in local. It is displayed on the control status display section.



M1-M2(SV2-LCL)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

A1-A2(SV2-LCL)

C1-A2(SV2-LCL)

AUT(LS1)

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

(LS2)*2

CAS(LS1)*1(LS2)*2

AUT(LS2)

CAS(LS1) *1

CAS(LS1)*1 MAN(LS1)(LS2)*2 MAN(LS2)

A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

C1

C1

M1

M1

M1

C1

A2

M2

M2

M2

M1



1-71IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function


Operation Mode Instrument's Front Panel Lamps Control Status Display Sections of LOOP 1

and 2 or METER 1 and 2 Displays Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 1 Loop 2

Manual control (M1) Manual control (M2) “M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL] is displayed. (*1)

Automatic control (A1) Automatic control (A2) “A” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are

displayed. (*1) Cascade setting automatic control (C1)

Automatic control (A2) “C” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [CAS], [SV2-LCL] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] is

displayed. (*1)








Automatic control (A1) Automatic control (A2)








Manual.


1-72 IM 01B08B02-02EN

The following table shows an output variable and control status in each operation mode according to the settings of the selector selection switch (SSW) tuning parameter and the autoselector selection (ATSEL) engineering parameter. Output Variables and Control Status in Each Operation Mode




AUT

LOW

Cascade setting automatic control (C1) (CAS)







(M2) Follows up MV.


HIGH








(M2) Follows up MV.


1 –

Cascade setting automatic control (C1) Outputs control operation. Automatic

control (A2) Follows up MV.

CNT1 output is selected regardless of the magnitude of CNT1 and CNT2 signals. Automatic

control (A1)

Manual control (M1)



2 –

Cascade setting automatic control (C1) Follows up MV. Automatic

control (A2) Outputs control operation.


control (A1)


(M2)


Follows up MV.



Manual.


1-73IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1(3) Controlling both loops 1 and 2 based on external setpoints from analog inputs

YS1000 accepts an external setpoint for loop 1 from analog input (terminal X2) and that for loop 2 from analog input (terminal X4) to perform selector control.





1-74 IM 01B08B02-02EN

X2

Y1

AUT1 2



(M1)/(M2)(A1)/(A2)/(C2)/(C1)



(SSW)


(C1)

(A1)/(M1)

(C1)(A1)

(M1)

(C2)

(A2)

(M2)


Setpoint (SV2)

Setpoint (SV1)

Loop 2's cascade

setting input

Loop 1's cascade

setting input Measurement

input 1Measurement

input 2

X1 X4 X3


LOOP 2 Display

LOOP 1 Display

–

–

[CAS] is displayed if loop 1 is in cascade control.

[SV2-RMT] is displayed if loop 2 is in remote. [SV2-LCL] is displayed if loop 2 is in local.



Same display as that of loop 1 [SEL1] is displayed if loop 1 output is selected. [SEL2] is displayed if loop 2 output is selected. Nothing appears for manual control.


(C2)(REMOTE)

(A2)/(M2)(LOCAL)



1-75IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1(C)

(C)SV2-RMT

(A)SV2-LCL

(M)SV2-RMT

(M)SV2-LCL

(A) (M)

A1-A2(SV2-LCL)

Loop 1 key lamp

Loop 2 key lamp

* Heavy lines indicate that the SV2-RMT/SV2-LCL status has been changed. *1: Transmission of “DDC” or “SPC” to LS1 using a communication

command is invalid.





A1-C2(SV2-RMT)

C1-C2(SV2-RMT)

A1-A2(SV2-LCL)

C1-A2(SV2-LCL)

M1-M2(SV2-RMT)

M1-M2(SV2-LCL)

MAN(LS2)

MAN(LS1)

AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

AUT(LS1)

AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

AUT(LS2)

MAN(LS2)

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS1)CAS(LS2)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

CAS(LS1)*1CAS(LS2)MAN(LS1)

CAS(LS1)*1AUT(LS2)

CAS(LS1)*1CAS(LS2)

CAS(LS1) *1

CAS(LS1) *1

CAS(LS2) CAS(LS2)

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

CAS(LS1)*1 MAN(LS1)CAS(LS2) MAN(LS2)

0145E.ai

A1

A1

A1

A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

A2

A2

C1

C1

C1

C1

C1

C2

C2

C2

C2

C2

M2

M2

M2

M1

M1

M1

M1

M1

M1

A2

M2

M2

C1

C2

M1

M2



1-76 IM 01B08B02-02EN




Manual control (M1)

Manual control (M2)

“M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights. [SV2-RMT] is displayed. (in C1-C2 mode or A1-C2 mode, for selection of manual control for loop 1) (*1)

“M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL] is displayed. (for selection of manual control for loop 2) (*1)



“A” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [SV2-RMT] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed. (*1)

Automatic control (A2) “A” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed. (*1)



“C” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [CAS], [SV2-RMT], and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed. (*1)

Automatic control (A2) “C” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [CAS], [SV2-LCL], and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed.

(*1) *1: [CSV1] (cascade setting input value) is displayed on the LOOP 1 Display, while [CSV2]

(cascade setting input value) is displayed on the LOOP 2 Display.




Manual control (M1) Manual control (M2) Set using a key or through communication (*1)




Cascade setting automatic control (C2) Set using a key or through

communication (*1) External setpoint from analog input (terminal X4)




External setpoint from analog input (terminal X2) External setpoint from analog input (terminal X4)

Automatic control (A2) External setpoint from analog input (terminal X2) Set using a key or through communication (*2)


Manual.


1-77IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1The following table shows an output variable and control status in each operation mode according to the settings of the selector selection switch (SSW) tuning parameter and autoselector selection (ATSEL) engineering parameter. Output Variables and Control Status in Each Operation Mode




AUT

LOW





CNT1 or CNT2, whichever is smaller, is selected. Automatic

control (A1) Automatic control (A2)


(M2) Follows up MV.


HIGH





CNT1 or CNT2, whichever is larger, is selected. Automatic

control (A1)Automatic control (A2)


(M2) Follows up MV.


1 –


operation.




Manual control (M1)



2 –



operation.




(M2)


Follows up MV.



Manual.


1-78 IM 01B08B02-02EN

(4) Loop 1 is controlled based on an external setpoint through communication (backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication), while loop 2 is controlled by YS1000 only.

YS1000 accepts an external setpoint for loop 1 through communication to perform selector control. If the high-level computer generally performing control fails in communication, the YS1000 backs up operation. If the computer recovers communication, control returns to the original condition.

Parameter Name Setting Range




Parameter Name Setting Range



1-79IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1

Y1



(M1)/(M2)/(C1)(BUM)

(A1)/(C1)(BUA)/(C1)(BUM)

(C1)(SPC)

(C1)

(A1)

(A2)

(M2)

(M1)

(C1)(SPC)/(A1)/(A2)/(C1)(BUA)

AUT

0146E.ai

1 2(SSW)

Manipulated output

X1 X3



Setpoint(SV1)

Setpoint (SV2)



Measurement input 1

Measurement input 2


Communication parameterSV1

LOOP 2 Display

LOOP 1 Display


–

–

[SPC] is displayed if loop 1 is in cascade control.

Loop 2's [SV2-LCL] is displayed




1-80 IM 01B08B02-02EN



(C)

(C)SV2-RMT

(A)SV2-LCL

(M)SV2-RMT

(M)SV2-LCL

(A) (M)

A1-A2(SV2-LCL)


SV2-LCL: Loop 2 is in local. It is displayed on the control status display section.





(A)SV2-LCL

SetpointLoop 2 key lamp

(BUA) (BUM)

BUA-A2(SV2-LCL)

BUM-A2(SV2-LCL)


0147E.ai

Loop 1 key lamp

Loop 2 key lamp

If writing in watchdog timer from the high-level computer is lost during the period set by YS1000's communication watchdog timer, the YS1000 determines that the computer has failed in communication. The YS1000 then disconnects from it and automatically changes the operation mode. If communication fails, the operation mode changes to (BUM) or (BUA).If communication recovers, it returns to (C) (CMP) (SPC).


AUT(LS1)

(LS2)*2SPC(LS1)*1 AUT(LS2)

SPC(LS1)*1

SPC(LS1)*1 MAN(LS1)(LS2)*2 MAN(LS2)

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)(LS2)*2MAN(LS1)

MAN(LS2)

A1-A2(SV2-LCL)

M1-M2(SV2-LCL)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

C1(SPC)-A2(SV2-LCL)


A1A2

C1

C1

M1

M1

A1

A1

A2

C1

M1

M1

M2

M2

A2

M2



1-81IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function


Operation Mode Instrument's Front Panel Lamps Control Status Display Sections of LOOP 1


Manual control (M1) Manual control (M2) “M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL] is displayed.

Automatic control (A1) Automatic control (A2) “A” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed.


Automatic control (A2) “C” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [SPC], [SV2-LCL], and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are

displayed.




“A” lamp lights. [BUA], [SV2-LCL], and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed.





[BUM] and [SV2-LCL] are displayed.







Automatic control (A1) Automatic control (A2)




Automatic control (A2) Set through communication (*1). Set using a key or through

communication (*2) Cascade setting automatic control (C1) (BUA)









Manual.


1-82 IM 01B08B02-02EN




AUT

LOW






Automatic control (A1) Cascade setting automatic control (C1) (BUA)

Manual control (M1) Follows up MV.

Manual control (M2)

Follows up MV.




HIGH






Automatic control (A1)Cascade setting automatic control (C1) (BUA)

Manual control (M1)

Follows up MV.

Manual control (M2)

Follows up MV.




1 –



Automatic control (A2) Follows up MV.

CNT1 output is selected regardless of the magnitude of CNT1 and CNT2 signals.


Manual control (M1) MV is operated using keys or through communication (*1). (Manual operation)

Manual control (M2)

Follows up MV. Follows up MV.



2 –


Follows up MV. Automatic control (A2)




Manual control (M1)

Follows up MV.

Manual control (M2)


Follows up MV.





Manual.


1-83IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1

Intentionally blank


1-84 IM 01B08B02-02EN

(5) Loop 1 is controlled based on an external setpoint through communication (backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication), while loop 2 is based on an external setpoint from analog input.

YS1000 accepts an external setpoint for loop 1 through communication and an external setpoint for loop 2 from analog input (terminal X4) to perform selector control. If the high-level computer generally performing control fails in communication, the YS1000 backs up operation. If the computer recovers communication, control returns to the original condition.








1-85IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1

Y1

AUT

(C1)(SPC)

(A2)(LOCAL)

1 2

Manipulated output

(C1)

(A1)

(M1)

(C2)

(A2)

(M2)

0148E.ai


LOOP 2 Display

LOOP 1 Display

Loop 2's cascade

setting inputMeasurement

input 1Measurement

input 2

X1 X4 X3



Setpoint (SV1)


(SSW)


Setpoint (SV2)


(M1)/(M2)/(C1)(BUM)

(C1)(SPC)/(C2)/(A1)/(A2)/(C1)(BUA)

(A1)/(C1)(BUA)/(C1)(BUM)


–

–

[SPC] is displayed if loop 1 is in cascade control. [SV2-RMT] is displayed if loop 2 is in remote. [SV2-LCL] is displayed if loop 2 is in local.



Loop 2's analog cascade setting value is displayed.

Communication parameterSV1

(C2)(REMOTE)



1-86IM

01B08B

02-02EN

(C)

(C)SV2-RMT

(A)SV2-LCL

(M)SV2-RMT

(M)SV2-LCL

(A) (M)

A1-A2(SV2-LCL)

C1(BUA)-C2(SV2-RMT)

C1(BUM)-C2(SV2-RMT)

CAS(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

CAS(LS2)

SPC(LS1)*1

AUT(LS2)

SPC(LS1)*1


MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS2)

A2

C1(SPC)-C2(SV2-RMT)

SPC(LS1)*1

MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

SPC(LS1)*1 MAN(LS1)

MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)CAS(LS2)

A1-C2(SV2-RMT)

AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

CAS(LS2)

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

CAS(LS2)MAN(LS1)

MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS2)

A1-A2(SV2-LCL)

M1-M2(SV2-RMT)

M1-M2(SV2-LCL)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

C1(SPC)-A2(SV2-LCL)

M1

M2

(C)SV2-RMT


(BUA) (BUM)

Loop 1key lamp

Loop 2 key lamp

If writing in watchidog timer from the high-level computer is lost during the period set by YS1000’s communication watchdog timer, the YS1000 determines that the computer has failed in communication. The YS1000 then disconnects from it and automatically changes the operation mode. If communication fails, the operation mode changes to (BUM) or (BUA). If communication recovers, it returns to (C) (CMP) (SPC).


* Heavy lines indicate that the SV2-LCL/SV2-RMT status has been changed. *1: Transmission of “CAS” to LS1 using a communication command is invalid.

Cn: Cascade setting automatic control, An: Automatic control, Mn: Manual control (n: “1” denotes loop 1, while “2” means loop 2.)


: Press this key (the number represents the loop concerned)MAN (LS1): Sends a communication command.


Setpoint

Loop 2 key lamp

0149E.ai





(A)SV2-LCL

(A)SV2-LCL

(BUA)

C1(BUA)-A2(SV2-LCL)

C1(BUM)-A2(SV2-LCL)

(BUM)

Setpoint

Loop 2 key lamp

Setpoint

Loop 2 key lamp


A1

A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

C1

C1

C1

C1

C2

C2

C2

C2

M2

M2

M1

M1

M1

M1

A1

A1

A2

A2

C1

C2

M1C2

M2

M1

M1

M2

A2

M2

M2



ode (CTL)

1-87IM

01B08B

02-02EN

Control Function 1

(C)

(C)SV2-RMT

(A)SV2-LCL

(M)SV2-RMT

(M)SV2-LCL

(A) (M)

A1-A2(SV2-LCL)

C1(BUA)-C2(SV2-RMT)

C1(BUM)-C2(SV2-RMT)

CAS(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

CAS(LS2)

SPC(LS1)*1

AUT(LS2)

SPC(LS1)*1


MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS2)

A2

C1(SPC)-C2(SV2-RMT)

SPC(LS1)*1

MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

SPC(LS1)*1 MAN(LS1)

MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)CAS(LS2)

A1-C2(SV2-RMT)

AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

CAS(LS2)

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

CAS(LS2)MAN(LS1)

MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS2)

A1-A2(SV2-LCL)

M1-M2(SV2-RMT)

M1-M2(SV2-LCL)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

C1(SPC)-A2(SV2-LCL)

M1

M2

(C)SV2-RMT


(BUA) (BUM)

Loop 1key lamp

Loop 2 key lamp

If writing in watchidog timer from the high-level computer is lost during the period set by YS1000’s communication watchdog timer, the YS1000 determines that the computer has failed in communication. The YS1000 then disconnects from it and automatically changes the operation mode. If communication fails, the operation mode changes to (BUM) or (BUA). If communication recovers, it returns to (C) (CMP) (SPC).


* Heavy lines indicate that the SV2-LCL/SV2-RMT status has been changed. *1: Transmission of “CAS” to LS1 using a communication command is invalid.





Setpoint

Loop 2 key lamp

0149E.ai





(A)SV2-LCL

(A)SV2-LCL

(BUA)

C1(BUA)-A2(SV2-LCL)

C1(BUM)-A2(SV2-LCL)

(BUM)

Setpoint

Loop 2 key lamp

Setpoint

Loop 2 key lamp


A1

A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

C1

C1

C1

C1

C2

C2

C2

C2

M2

M2

M1

M1

M1

M1

A1

A1

A2

A2

C1

C2

M1C2

M2

M1

M1

M2

A2

M2

M2



ode (CTL)

1-88 IM 01B08B02-02EN



Manual control (M1)

Manual control (M2)

“M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights. [SV2-RMT] is displayed. (in C1(SPC)-C2 mode or A1-A2 mode, for selection of manual control for loop 1) (*1)





Automatic control (A2) “A” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed. (*1)



“C” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [SPC], [SV2-RMT], and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed. (*1)

Automatic control (A2) “C” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [SPC], [SV2-LCL], and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed.

(*1)




“C” lamp lights. [BUA], [SV2-RMT], and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed. (*1)



“A” lamp lights. [BUA], [SV2-LCL], and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed. (*1)





[BUM] and [SV2-RMT] are displayed. (*1)




[BUM] and [SV2-LCL] are displayed. (*1)





Manual control (M1) Manual control (M2) Set using a key or


External setpoint from analog input (terminal X4) (in SV2-RMT mode)

Manual control (M2) Set using a key or through communication (*2) (in SV2-LCL mode)







Cascade setting automatic control (C2) Set through

communication (*1). External setpoint from analog input (terminal X4)













Manual.


1-89IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1The following table shows an output variable and control status in each operation mode according to the settings of the selector selection switch (SSW) tuning parameter and autoselector selection (ATSEL) engineering parameter. Output Variables and Control Status in Each Operation Mode (1/2)



AUT

LOW








Cascade setting automatic control (C2) Automatic control (A2)



Manual control (M1)

Follows up MV.

Manual control (M2)

Follows up MV.

MV is operated using keys or via communication (manual operation).



HIGH












Manual control (M1)

Follows up MV.

Manual control (M2)

Follows up MV.





1 –




Follows up MV.

CN1 output is selected regardless of the magnitude of CNT1 and CNT2 signals.






Manual control (M1) MV is operated using keys or via communication (manual operation).

Manual control (M2)

Follows up MV. Follows up MV. Cascade setting automatic control (C1) (BUM)



1-90 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Output Variables and Control Status in Each Operation Mode (2/2) Parameter Setpoint Loop 1 (CNT1) Loop 2 (CNT2) Control Status


2 –


Follows up MV.



CN2 output is selected regardless of the magnitude of CNT1 and CNT2 signals.






Manual control (M1)

Follows up MV.

Manual control (M2)


Follows up MV. Cascade setting automatic control (C1) (BUM)




Manual.


1-91IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1(6) Control is performed based on an external manipulated output variable through communication (backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication).

YS1000 accepts an external manipulated output variable through communication to perform selector control. If the high-level computer generally performing control fails in communication, the YS1000 backs up operation. If the computer recovers communication, control returns to the original condition.







1-92 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Y1

AUT1 2

Manipulated output

(C1)

(A1)

(A2)

(M2)

(M1)

0150E.ai

X1 X3


Measurement input 1

Measurement input 2

LOOP 2 Display

LOOP 1 Display


(C1)(DDC)


(A1)/(A2)/(C1)(BUA)

(M1)/(M2)/(C1)(BUM)

(SSW)


Setpoint (SV2)

Setpoint (SV1)

Communication parameterMV

–

–

[DDC] is displayed in cascade control.

Loop 2's [SV2-LCL] is displayed.








1-93IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1



(C)

(C)SV2-RMT

(A)SV2-LCL

(M)SV2-RMT

(M)SV2-LCL

(A) (M)

A1-A2(SV2-LCL)

Cn: Cascade setting automatic control,An: Automatic control, Mn: Manual control

(n: “1” denotes loop 1, while “2” means loop 2.) SV2-LCL: Loop 2 is in local.






(A)SV2-LCL


(BUA) (BUM)

C1(BUA)-A2(SV2-LCL)

C1(BUM)-A2(SV2-LCL)

* Operation does not change even if the “C” mode key on the LOOP 2 Display is pressed. The loop 2 depends on operationof the loop 1's “C” mode key.

0151E.ai

Loop 1 key lamp

Loop 2 key lamp

If writing watchdog timer from the high-level computer is lost during the period set by YS1000's communication watchdog timer, the YS1000 determines that the computer has failed in communication. The YS1000 then disconnects from it and automatically changes the operation mode. If communication fails, the operation mode changes to (BUM) or (BUA).If communication recovers, it returns to (C) (CMP) (DDC ).


AUT(LS1)

(LS2)*2DDC(LS1)*1 AUT(LS2)

DDC(LS1)*1

DDC (LS1)*1

MAN(LS1)(LS2)*2 MAN(LS2)

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)(LS2)*2MAN(LS1)

MAN(LS2)

A1-A2(SV2-LCL)

M1-M2(SV2-LCL)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

C1(DDC)-A2(SV2-LCL)


A1A2

C1

C1

M1

M1

A1

A1

A2

C1

M1

M1

M2

M2

A2

M2



1-94 IM 01B08B02-02EN


Operation Mode Instrument's Front Panel Lamps

Control Status Display Sections of LOOP 1 and 2

or METER 1 and 2 Displays Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 1 Loop 2

Manual control (M1) Manual control (M2) “M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL] is displayed.

Automatic control (A1) Automatic control (A2) “A” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL] and [SEL1] or

[SEL2] are displayed. Cascade setting automatic control (C1) (DDC)

Automatic control (A2) “C” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [DDC] and [SV2-LCL] are

displayed.




“A” lamp lights. [BUA], [SV2-LCL] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed.





[BUM] and [SV2-LCL] are displayed.




Manual control (M1) Manual control (M2) At change from (A2) to (M2)



Automatic control (A1) Automatic control (A2) Set using a key or through communication (*1)


Cascade setting automatic control (C1) (DDC) Automatic control (A2) Set through communication (*1). Set using a key or through

communication (*2) Cascade setting automatic control (C1) (BUA) Automatic control (A2) Set using a key or through

communication (*1) Set using a key or through communication (*2)

Cascade setting automatic control (C1) (BUM) Automatic control (A2) Set using a key or through

communication (*1) Set using a key or through communication (*2)


Manual.


1-95IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1The following table shows an output variable and control status in each operation mode according to the settings of the selector selection switch (SSW) tuning parameter and autoselector selection (ATSEL) engineering parameter. Output Variables and Control Status in Each Operation Mode



AUT

LOW

Automatic control (A1) Outputs control operation. (Loop 1's output = MV + Kp1 × E1 if not selected)






Follows up MV.


Follows up MV.

MV is controlled via communication (manual operation).

Manual control (M1) Manual control (M2) MV is controlled using keys or via communication (manual operation).



HIGH







Follows up MV.


Follows up MV.

MV is controlled via communication (manual operation).

Manual control (M1) Manual control (M2) MV is controlled using keys or via communication (manual operation).



1 –




Follows up MV.






Follows up MV. Automatic control (A2) Follows up MV. MV is controlled via communication (manual operation).

Manual control (M1) MV is controlled using keys or via communication (*1). (Manual operation)

Manual control (M2)



2 –


Follows up MV.

Automatic control (A2) Outputs control operation.






Follows up MV. Automatic control (A2) Follows up MV. MV is controlled via communication (manual operation).

Manual control (M1)

Follows up MV.

Manual control (M2) MV is controlled using keys or via communication (*2). (Manual operation)





Manual.


1-96 IM 01B08B02-02EN

(7) Performing control based on external manipulated output variable through communication (backing it up if the high-level computer fails in communication) and based on an external setpoint for loop 2 from analog input

YS1000 accepts an external manipulated output variable through communication and an external setpoint for loop 2 from analog input (terminal X4) to perform selector control. If the high-level computer generally performing control fails in communication, the YS1000 backs up operation. If the computer recovers communication, control returns to the original condition.








1-97IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1

AUT1 2

Manipulated output

Y1

(C1)

(A1)

(M1)

(C2)

(A2)

(M2)

0152E.ai

LOOP 2 Display

LOOP 1 Display

Loop 2's cascade

setting valueMeasurement

input 1Measurement

input 2

X1 X4 X3

(M1)/(M2)/(C1)(BUM)

(C1)(DDC)

(C1)/(A1)/(A2)/(C1)(BUA)



(A2)/(M2)(LOCAL)

(SSW)



Setpoint (SV2)

Setpoint (SV1)

Communication parameter MV

(C2)(REMOTE)




–

–

[DDC] is displayed if loop 1 is in cascade control.




[SV2-RMT] is displayed if loop 2 is in remote. [SV2-LCL] is displayed if loop 2 is in local. Nothing appears for manual control.




1-98IM

01B08B

02-02EN

(C)

(C)SV2-RMT

(A)SV2-LCL

(M)SV2-RMT

(M)SV2-LCL

(A) (M)

CAS(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

CAS(LS2)

DDC(LS1)*1

AUT(LS2)

DDC(LS1)*1

DDC (LS1)*1


MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS2)

C1(DDC)-C2(SV2-RMT)

DDC(LS1)*1

MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

DDC(LS1)*1

MAN(LS1)

MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)CAS(LS2)

A1-C2(SV2-RMT)

AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

CAS(LS2)

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

CAS(LS2)MAN(LS1)

MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS2)

A1-A2(SV2-LCL)

M1-M2(SV2-RMT)

M1-M2(SV2-LCL)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

C1(DDC)-A2(SV2-LCL)

DDC(LS1)

*1

M1

M2

C1(BUA)-C2(REM)

C1(BUM)-C2(REM)

(C)REM


(BUA) (BUM)

Loop 1 key lamp

Loop 2 key lamp

0153E.ai




(A)SV2-LCL

(A)SV2-LCL

(BUA)

C1(BUA)-A2(LCL)

C1(BUM)-A2(LCL)

(BUM)

Setpoint

Loop 2 key lamp

Setpoint

Loop 2 key lamp






A1-A2(SV2-LCL)






A1

A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

C1

C1

C1

C1

C2

C2

C2

C2

M2

M2

M1

M1

M1

M1

A2

C1

C1

C2

C2

M2

M1

M1

M1

A1

A1

A2

M2

A2

M2

M2


C1



ode (CTL)

1-99IM

01B08B

02-02EN

Control Function 1

(C)

(C)SV2-RMT

(A)SV2-LCL

(M)SV2-RMT

(M)SV2-LCL

(A) (M)

CAS(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

CAS(LS2)

DDC(LS1)*1

AUT(LS2)

DDC(LS1)*1

DDC (LS1)*1


MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS2)

C1(DDC)-C2(SV2-RMT)

DDC(LS1)*1

MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

DDC(LS1)*1

MAN(LS1)

MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS1)CAS(LS2)

A1-C2(SV2-RMT)

AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

AUT(LS1)

CAS(LS2)

MAN(LS1)MAN(LS2)

CAS(LS2)MAN(LS1)

MAN(LS2)

AUT(LS2)

A1-A2(SV2-LCL)

M1-M2(SV2-RMT)

M1-M2(SV2-LCL)

AUT(LS1)AUT(LS2)

C1(DDC)-A2(SV2-LCL)

DDC(LS1)

*1

M1

M2

C1(BUA)-C2(REM)

C1(BUM)-C2(REM)

(C)REM


(BUA) (BUM)

Loop 1 key lamp

Loop 2 key lamp

0153E.ai




(A)SV2-LCL

(A)SV2-LCL

(BUA)

C1(BUA)-A2(LCL)

C1(BUM)-A2(LCL)

(BUM)

Setpoint

Loop 2 key lamp

Setpoint

Loop 2 key lamp






A1-A2(SV2-LCL)






A1

A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

C1

C1

C1

C1

C2

C2

C2

C2

M2

M2

M1

M1

M1

M1

A2

C1

C1

C2

C2

M2

M1

M1

M1

A1

A1

A2

M2

A2

M2

M2


C1



ode (CTL)

1-100 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Display Status of the Instrument's Front Panel in Each Operation Mode Operation Mode Instrument's Front Panel Lamps Control Status Display Sections of LOOP 1




“M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights. [SV2-RMT] is displayed. (in C1(DDC)-C2 mode or A1-C2 mode, for selection of manual control for loop 1) (*1)




Automatic control (A2) “A” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed.

(*1)



“C” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [DDC] and [SV2-RMT] are displayed. (*1)

Automatic control (A2) “C” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [DDC] and [SV2-LCL] are displayed. (*1)




“C” lamp lights. [BUA], [SV2-RMT] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed. (*1)



“A” lamp lights. [BUA], [SV2-LCL] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed. (*1)





[BUM] and [SV2-RMT] are displayed. (*1)




[BUM] and [SV2-LCL] are displayed. (*1)


Setpoints in Each Operation Mode Operation Mode Setpoints (SV1, SV2)



Cascade setting automatic control (C2) Set using a key or


External setpoint from analog input (terminal X4) (in SV2-RMT mode)

Automatic control (A2) Set using a key or through communication (*2) (in SV2-LCL mode)

Manual control (M1)

Manual control (M2) At change from (C2) to (M2) Set using a key or



Manual control (M2) At change from (A2) to (M2) Set using a key or through communication (*2)


Cascade setting automatic control (C2) Set through

communication (*1). External setpoint from analog input (terminal X4)













Manual.


1-101IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1The following table shows an output variable and control status in each operation mode according to the settings of the selector selection switch (SSW) tuning parameter and autoselector selection (ATSEL) engineering parameter. Output Variables and Control Status in Each Operation Mode (1/2)



AUT

LOW

Automatic control (A1) Outputs control

operation. (Loop 1's output = MV + Kp1 × E1 if not selected)


operation. (Loop 2’s output = MV + Kp2 × E2 if not selected)

CNT1 or CNT2, whichever is smaller, is selected. Cascade setting

automatic control (C1) (BUA)

Automatic control (A2) Cascade setting automatic control (C2) Automatic control (A2)


Follows up MV.


Follows up MV.

MV is operated via communication (manual operation). Automatic control (A2)





HIGH


Outputs control operation. (Loop 1’s output = MV + Kp1 × E1 if not selected)


operation. (Loop 2’s output = MV + Kp2 × E2 if not selected)






Follows up MV.


Follows up MV. MV is operated using keys or via communication (manual operation).

Automatic control (A2) Manual control (M1) Manual control (M2)




1 –

Automatic control (A1) Outputs control

operation.


Follows up MV. CNT1 output is selected regardless of the magnitude of CNT1 and CNT2 signals.





Follows up MV. Cascade setting automatic control (C2) Follows up MV.

MV is operated via communication (manual operation). Automatic control (A2)

Manual control (M1) MV is operated

using keys or via communication (*1). (Manual operation)

Manual control (M2)




1-102 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Output Variables and Control Status in Each Operation Mode (2/2) Parameter Setpoint Loop 1 (CNT1) Loop 2 (CNT2) Control Status


2 –


Follows up MV.








Follows up MV.


MV is operated via communication (manual operation). Automatic control

(A2) Manual control (M1)

Follows up MV.

Manual control (M2) MV is operated

using keys or via communication (*2). (Manual operation)




*1: Set to communication register MV1 *2: Set to communication register MV1 For setting through communication: see YS1000 Series Communication Interface User’s

Manual.


1-103IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

11.1.4 Control in the Programmable Mode (CTL = PROG) (YS1700 Only) The YS1700 controllers incorporate the computation and control functions necessary for control as computation function libraries. In the programmable mode, these functions are combined in programs to create computation and control functions. For setting displays and setting details: see 1.1, Selecting the Controller Mode (CTL), in this

manual. For programmable mode: see YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700 Programmable Function

User’s Manual.

X1

Y1

X5

Y2

X8

Y4

X6

Y3

Programs created by the customer

DIn/DOn terminals are shared; they should be used by specifying either of them.

DIn/DOn terminals are shared; they can be used by designating either one of them.

DI6/DO1

Expandable I/O

Expandable I/O

DI6/DO1

DI5/DO2

DI5/DO2

DI4/DO3

DI4/DO3

DI3/DO4

DI3/DO4

DI2/DO5

DI2/DO5

DI1/DO6

DI1/DO6

DI7

DO7

DI8

DO8

DI9

DO9

DI10

DO10

Expandable I/O

toto

Expandable I/O

0154E.ai

The program below is set at factory shipment.

0154-01E.ai

X1

Y1

CSV1

SV1

Y2 Y3

BSC1

X2


1-104 IM 01B08B02-02EN

1.2 Selecting the Control Method (Selecting Control Type CNT and Control Operation Formula ALG)

Setting Display

Engineering Display

0155E.ai


Setting Details


CNT1, CNT2 Control type

PID: Standard PID control S-PI: Sample-and-hold PI control BATCH: Batch PID control (*1) PD: Proportional (PD) control (*2)

PID

ALG1, ALG2Control operation formula

I-PD: PV proportional type PID PI-D: PV derivative type PID SVF: Adjustable setpoint filter

I-PD

*1: Selectable only in YS1700 *2: For proportional PD control, always select PV derivative type PID (PI-D). The CNT2 and ALG2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable mode.

Table Controller Modes and Control Types

Controller ModeControl Type Single-loop Mode

Cascade Mode Selector Mode

Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 1 Loop 2

Standard PID control

Proportional (PD) control – – – –

Sample-and-hold PI control – –

Batch PID control – – – – –

Legend : Available, –: Not available

1-105IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1The control types (CNT) and control operation formulas (ALG) should be set as shown below according to the control purpose:

CNT ALG

PID PD S-PI BATCH PI-D I-PD SVF1.2.1, Performing Stable Control without Abrupt Output Changes (PV Proportional Type PID (I-PD))

1.2.2, Performing Control with Emphasis on Setpoint Follow-up (PV Derivative Type PID (PI-D))

1.2.6, Performing Stable Control for the Step Response of Setpoints (Adjustable Setpoint Filter)

1.2.4, Performing Stable Control in Which a Setpoint is not Exceeded (Proportional (PD) Control)

1.2.9, Controlling a Process with Long Dead Time (Sample-and-hold PI Control)

1.2.10, Performing Control with Rapidly Settling Setpoints (Batch PID Control (YS1700 Programmable Mode Only))

1.2.3, Stopping Integral Action to Conduct Control with Less Overshoot (Output Limiter)

1.2.5, Performing Control with Quick Rise (PID Control with Reset Bias)

1.2.7, Performing Control with Gain Characteristics Such as Neutralization Control (Non-linear PID Control)

1.2.8, Performing Control Canceling out Disturbance (Feedforward Control)

1.2.11, Performing Control Switching Multiple PID Parameters (Preset PID (in YS1700 Programmable Mode Only))


1-106 IM 01B08B02-02EN

1.2.1 Performing Stable Control without Abrupt Output Changes (PV Proportional Type PID (I-PD))

Description

Proportional action (P) and derivative action (D) operate on a process variable (PV) rather than a deviation (E). Because changing a setpoint (SV) does not activate proportional action (P) or derivative action (D), the output (MV) does not change abruptly. This control offers stable control characteristics with respect to a characteristic change in the control target, load variations, or disturbance. It is particularly useful for cases where a setpoint (SV) is quickly changed through communication from the high-level system.

0156E.ai

•PV•E+PV+MV= TD•S

TI•SPB 1+(TD/m)S1100

where MV: manipulated output variable, PV: process variable, E: deviation (E = PV – SV), PB: proportional band, TI: integral time, TD: derivative time, m: derivative gain, and S: Laplacian operator

-

+

+

+SV

PV

MV+

TD•S1+(TD/m)S

TI•S1

PB100

0157E.ai

PV Proportional Type PID (I-PD) Function Block Diagram

Setting Details

Parameter Name Setpoint Display Transition and Display Title

CNT1, CNT2 Control type PIDTuning Display > Engineering Display > [CONFIG2] (Configuration Display 2) ALG1, ALG2

Control operation formula

I-PD

The CNT2 and ALG2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable mode.


1-107IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

11.2.2 Performing Control with Emphasis on Setpoint Follow-up (PV Derivative Type PID (PI-D))

Description

Proportional action (P) and integral action (I) operate on a deviation (E), while derivative action (D) operates on a process variable (PV). This control is useful for cases where emphasis is placed on the follow-up capability of a process variable (PV) such as the loop 2 in cascade control.

0158E.ai

•PV•E+E+MV= TD•S

TI•SPB 1+(TD/m)S1100

where MV: manipulated output variable, PV: process variable, E: deviation (E = PV – SV), P: proportional band, TI: integral time, TD: derivative time, m: derivative gain, and S: Laplacian operator

-

+

+

+SV

PV

MVTI•S

1

TD•S1+(TD/m)S

PB100+

0159E.ai

PV Derivative Type PID (PI-D) Function Block Diagram

Setpoint (SV)

PV (PV derivative type PID (PI-D))

Setpoint (SV) change

PV (PV proportional type PID (I-PD))

Time

0160E.ai

Response Waveform of PV Proportional Type PID (I-PD) and PV Derivative Type PID (PI-D)

Setting Details




PI-D



1-108 IM 01B08B02-02EN

1.2.3 Stopping Integral Action to Conduct Control with Less Overshoot (Output Limiter)

Description

If a manipulated output (MV) appears to exceed a limit value (high limit setpoint of MV (MH) or low limit setpoint of MV (ML)), this control stops integral action (I) to prevent reset windup (saturated output status caused by integral action (I)), thereby achieving stable control with less overshoot. The following table shows the action of manipulated output (MV) according to the settings of MH and ML.

Action of Manipulated Output (MV)

MH > ML MV operates in the setting range. * For manual control (M), MV operates in the range of −6.3 to 106.3%.

MH ≤ ML Do not set.

Setting Details




PI-D, I-PD, SVF

The CNT2 and ALG2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable mode. For PI-D setpoint: see 1.2.2, Performing Control with Emphasis on Setpoint Follow-up (PV

Derivative Type PID (PI-D)), in this manual. For I-PD setpoint: see 1.2.1, Performing Stable Control without Abrupt Output Changes (PV

Proportional Type PID (I-PD)), in this manual. For SVF setpoint: see 1.2.6, Performing Stable Control for the Step Response of Setpoints

(Adjustable Setpoint Filter), in this manual.

Parameter Name Setting Range Display Transition and Display Title

MH1, MH2 High limit setpoint of MV −6.3 to 106.3% Tuning Display > [PID1] (PID Setting Display 1) or [PID2] (PID Setting Display 2) ML1, ML2 Low limit setpoint of MV −6.3 to 106.3%

The MH2 and ML2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable mode.


1-109IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

11.2.4 Performing Stable Control in Which a Setpoint is not Exceeded (Proportional (PD) Control)

Description

This control type performs control in which integral action (I) is excluded from PID action. It is useful when stable control without overshoot is desired for integral processes in which constant flows are delivered. Note that to use proportional (PD) control, be sure to set PV derivative type PID (PI-D) for the control operation formula (ALG).

0161E.ai

•PVE+MV= +MRTD•S

PB 1+(TD/m)S100

where MV: manipulated output variable, PV: process variable, E: deviation (E = PV – SV), PB: proportional band, TD: derivative time, m: derivative gain, S: Laplacian operator, and MR: manual reset

If the operation mode is switched to change proportional band (PB), first-order lag follow-up is performed to achieve bumpless output. It is also possible to use this type of control together with non-linear PID control. The table below shows operations performed when the operation mode is switched.

Operation Mode Transition Status Effected Instantly upon Transition to Each

Operation Mode Setpoint (SV) Control Status

(1) (C)(CAS) → (A) SV immediately before transition is held.


(2) (C)(CAS) → (M) SV immediately before transition is held.

A manipulated output variable immediately before transition is held, enabling manual operation.

(3) (C)(CMP)(SPC) → – The operation mode is changed in the same way as the (CAS) mode. (4) (C)(CMP)(DDC) → –

(5) (C) → –If the (C) mode is not used, to prevent inadvertent operation the operation mode does not change even if the “C” mode key is pressed.

(6) (A) → (C) Quick response to a cascade setting value

A first-order lag is followed up to continue control.

(7) (A) → (M) SV immediately before transition is held. Manual operation

(8) (M) → (C)Switching directly from (M) to (C) is impossible. (Switch once from (M) to (A) and then switch from (A) to (C)). It is, however, possible in the DDC mode.

(9) (M) → (A) SV immediately before transition is held.

A first-order lag is followed up to continue control.

* For the meaning of the (M), (A), (C), (CAS), (CMP), (SPC), and (DDC) symbols, see 1.1, Selecting the Controller Mode (CTL), in this manual.


1-110 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Operation Mode

(C) (A) (M) (A) (C)

Manual operation

(1)

Time

Time

Setpoint

Output variable First-order lag follow-up

←See the table on a previous page.

Setpoint change

Cascade setting value

(7) (9) (6)

(Cases where a process variable is almost constant in direct action)

0162E.ai

Operation Mode Switching and Changing of Setpoint (SV) and Manipulated Output Variable (MV)

Example of use of proportional (PD) control (1) Liquid level control of tanks (integral process control) This is the control of the rate of inflow to regulate the liquid level in integral processes

where a constant flow is delivered using a metering pump. Proportional (PD) control enables stable control results to be obtained in which no

overshoot is caused.

SV

Constant flow

YS1700/YS1500 proportional (PD) control

0% output

100% output

MR=50%+α

0163E.ai

Legend SV: setpoint, MR: manual resetIntegral Process Control


1-111IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1(2) Control of the end-point in chemical reactions In processes where raw materials are heated to promote thermal chemical reactions

in the formation of products, it is necessary to detect product formation status using an analyzer to close the heat steam valve according to a setpoint (end point) so that overheating is not caused in control.

Example of chemical reaction end-point control

Reactor

Composition analyzer

Steam

YS1700/YS1500 proportional (PD) control

SV

Process variables of composition

Start of reaction End of reaction

PB

Manual reset to 0%

0% output (valve closed)

100% outputC

ompositionsJacket

0164E.ai

Legend SV: setpoint, PB: proportional bandChemical Reaction End-point Control

Setting Details


CNT1, CNT2 Control type PDTuning Display > Engineering Display > [CONFIG2] (Configuration Display 2) ALG1, ALG2


PI-D


Derivative Type PID (PI-D)), in this manual.


MR1, MR2 Manual reset −6.3 to 106.3% Tuning Display > [PID1] (PID Setting Display 1) or [PID2] (PID Setting Display 2) TI1, TI2 Integral time (first-order

lag follow-up time) 1 to 9999 sec

The MR2 and TI2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the programmable mode.


1-112 IM 01B08B02-02EN

1.2.5 Performing Control with Quick Rise (PID Control with Reset Bias)

Description

PID control with reset bias is used if it is desired to achieve response with quick rise by positively utilizing reset windup. It is useful for controlling heating processes, pressure release values, etc. Because the output’s saturated bias is arbitrarily set in reset bias (RB), the time taken between the instant when a process variable (PV) starts to recover and the instant when a manipulated output variable (MV) deviates a limit value can be set.

Adjustment method Increasing the reset bias (RB) improves the response characteristics, shortening the time required for the process variable to reach the setpoint (SV). If RB is set to 100% or higher, corrective action starts after the positions of the setpoint (SV) and process variable (PV) reverse one another.Moreover, if RB is set to 0%, PID control in which the reset bias (RB) is disabled is performed. An optimum reset bias (RB) value should be empirically determined by observing the response characteristics.

Examples of usage(1) Batch process temperature control

ON/OFF command

Raw materialPV

Simple batch process

Steam

Stop valveValve

End of batch Start of batch

PV (for RB = 0%)

PV (temperature)

SV (set temperature)

MV (valve opening)

RB

MH

Time

MV'=MH + RB

MV (for RB = 0%)

0165E.ai

MV

Simple Batch Heating Process

In a simple batch heating process like the one above, when a batch process ends, the steam stop valve is closed according to the setpoint (SV) and operation mode remains unchanged. The manipulated output variable (MV) is limited at the high limit setpoint of MV (MH) while the batch process is stopped. Note that the manipulated output variable (MV’) before passing through the high limit setpoint of MV (MH) is clamped at “MH + RB” due to the effects of the reset bias (RB) (reset windup status). If the next batch process starts in this condition, the steam valve is opened, causing the process variable (PV) to increase gradually. The release of the manipulated output variable (MV) from the output limit point is delayed due to the effects of the reset bias (RB). Therefore, process variable (PV) rise times can be improved. In contrast, if the reset bias (RB) = 0, there is no reset windup; the manipulated output variable is immediately released from the high limit setpoint of MV (MH) as the process variable starts to rise. This causes the process variable (PV) rise time to be longer.


1-113IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1(2) Controlling pressure release valves and safety valves Pressure release valves and safety valves are controlled with the reset bias (RB)

value set to 100%. A safety valve is closed in a steady-state condition, and its internal pressure rises in the event of a process abnormality. If the internal pressure exceeds the safety valve opening setpoint, the valve releases the internal pressure to provide process safety.

PV

MV

Pressure signal

Safety valveProcess

Abnormality occurred Abnormality

removedPV (internal pressure)

MV

RB

Time

Safety valve release region

Normal value

Normal value

MV'=ML-RB

YS1700/YS1500

RB

SV (safety valve releasing setpoint)

0166E.ai

ML closed

Safety Valve Control

Setting Details




PI-D, I-PD, SVF


Derivative Type PID (PI-D)), in this manual.

For I-PD setpoint: see 1.2.1, Performing Stable Control without Abrupt Output Changes (PV Proportional Type PID (I-PD)), in this manual.

For SVF setpoint: see 1.2.6, Performing Stable Control for the Step Response of Setpoints (Adjustable Setpoint Filter), in this manual.


RB1, RB2 Reset bias 0.0 to 106.3% Tuning Display > [PID1] (PID Setting Display 1) or [PID2] (PID Setting Display 2)

The RB2 parameter is used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable mode.


1-114 IM 01B08B02-02EN

1.2.6 Performing Stable Control for the Step Response of Setpoints (Adjustable Setpoint Filter)

Description

The values of optimum PID parameters (proportional band (PB), integral time (TI), and derivative time (TD)) that minimize a disturbance (D) that is superimposing on a process variable (PV) do not necessarily agree with the optimum PID parameters that deliver follow-up capabilities for setpoint (SV) change. When YS1000 control with the adjustable setpoint filter (SVF), if the setpoint (SV) is changed in steps with the optimum PID parameters for limiting disturbance left unchanged, the response tends to be overshot. Thus, a filtering operation is conducted for the setpoint (SV) to optimally adjust the step response waveform.

Operation principle This control adds filters to the setpoint (SV) using the PV derivative type PID (PI-D) control algorithm as a basis. Adjusting the setpoint filters α (SFA) and β (SFB) enables the adjustment of follow-up capability with respect to changing the setpoint (SV) without changing the optimum PID parameters. For the setpoint filters α (SFA) and β (SFB), see “Effects of Setpoint Filters α (SFA) and β (SFB)” which follows.

The following shows the operation formula for an adjustable setpoint filter (SVF).

0167E.ai

SVF=1+(α•TI−β•TD)S1+(TI+TD)S

where SVF: adjustable setpoint filter, α and β: setpoint filters, TI: integral time, TD: derivative time, and S: Laplacian operator α = 0 to 1, β = 0 to 1 α • TI − β • TD ≥ 0 If β = 0, TD in the formula = 0

(If β = 0, TD in the formula = 0) GP: process transfer function

-+ +

+SV

PVMVGP(S)

+

TI•S

1

TD•S

1+(TD/m)S

PB

100

1+(TI+TD)S

1+(α•TI−β•TD)S

0168E.ai

Adjustable Setpoint Filter (SVF) Function Block Diagram


1-115IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1Operation characteristics The adjustable setpoint filter (SVF) shows filtering characteristics = 1 if setpoint filter α (SFA) = 1 and setpoint filter β (SFB) = 0, which is equivalent to PV derivative type PID (PI-D). Moreover, if setpoint filter α (SFA) = 0 and setpoint filter β (SFB) = 0, the filtering characteristics change to first-order lag operation where integral time (TI) is regarded as the time constant, causing the adjustable setpoint filter to be equivalent to PV proportional type PID (I-PD). Setting setpoint filter α (SFA) to a range of 0 < α < 1 enables a follow-up waveform intermediate to those obtained by two control operation formulas (ALG) to be achieved in proportion to the magnitude of α.

Optimum α, β

α=1, β=0

α=0, β=1Setpoint (SV)

Setpoint (SV) changeTime

0169E.ai

Response Waveform of Adjustable Setpoint Filter (SVF)

Effects of setpoint filters α (SFA) and β (SFB) The figure below shows follow-up waveforms of setpoint (SV) generated when setpoint filters α (SFA) and β (SFB) are changed from 0 to 1 respectively.

PV α =1.0

Fixed to β = 0α =0.3α =0.6

α =0.0

Time0 0

PV

β =1.0

Fixed to α = 0.5β =0.3

β =0.0

β =0.6

Time0170E.ai

Effects of Setpoint Filters α (SFA) and β (SFB)

Setpoint filter α (SFA) is effective in achieving follow-up capability. A more abrupt follow-up waveform is obtained as the value of setpoint filter α (SFA) gets greater. Setpoint filter β (SFB) is a fine-tuning parameter and enables the effects of improvements on follow-up waveforms in which the overshoot is small to be achieved as its value gets greater.


1-116 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Tuning method (1) Cases not using the self-tuning (STC) function

• Vary the manipulated output variable (MV) to obtain the optimum PID parameter based on its response.

• Change a setpoint (SV) in steps to adjust setpoint filter α (SFA) so that the desired follow-up waveform is obtained. For control provided with derivative action (D), make further fine adjustments using setpoint filter β (SFB).

• The recommended values of setpoint filters α (SFA) and β (SFB) are 0.5 for setpoint filter α (SFA) and 0.0 for setpoint filter β (SFB).

(2) Cases using the self-tuning (STC) function Using the self-tuning (STC) function, determine PID parameters that limit a

disturbance (D) and obtain setpoint filter α (SFA) so that follow-up is made with respect to a setpoint (SV). However, setpoint filter β (SFB) is not calculated.

To use the self-tuning (STC) function, set setpoint filter α (SFA) = 0.5 and setpoint filter β (SFB) = 0.0.

For self-tuning (STC) function: see Chapter 7, Self-tuning Function, in this manual.

Example of usage The adjustable setpoint filter is useful in the following cases: (1) Loop 2 in cascade control (cases where use of PV derivative type PID (PI-D) results

in an abrupt response) (2) Program temperature control (3) Control loop where setpoint (SV) changes are frequent

Setting Details


CNT1, CNT2 Control type PID Tuning Display > Engineering Display > [CONFIG2] (Configuration Display 2) ALG1, ALG2 Control operation formula SVF



SFA1, SFA2 Adjustable setpoint filter α 0.000 to 1.000 Tuning Display > [PID1] (PID Setting

Display 1) or [PID2] (PID Setting Display 2) SFB1, SFB2 Adjustable setpoint filter

β 0.000 to 1.000

The SFA2 and SFB2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable mode.


1-117IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

11.2.7 Performing Control with Gain Characteristics Such as Neutralization Control (Non-linear PID Control)

Description

Non-linear PID control multiplies a deviation (E) by the non-linear control gain (GG) if the deviation is smaller than the non-linear control gap width (GW), or multiplies it by “1” if it is greater than GW. This control type is useful for achieving follow-up capability for setpoint (SV) changes or for the control of a noisy flow system.

The following shows an operation diagram of non-linear PID control.

Deviation

Output of a non-linear element

This inclination is non-linear control

gain (GG)

GG=0

GG=1(Deviation = non-linear output)

10%

10%Offset

GW=10%

0171E.ai

Operation of Non-linear PID Control

The table below shows the action of non-linear PID control based on the setting of the non-linear control gain.

Setpoint Operation Description

GG = 0.000 An output is always produced with respect to deviation (E). Deviation (E) = non-linear output

0.000 < GG < 1.000

• The result of deviation (E) × non-linear control gain (GG) is output if the deviation is within the non-linear control gap width (GW).

• Calculation is made with the gain as “1” if the deviation is out of the non-linear control gap width (GW). (*)

GG = 1.000

• The output of the non-linear element becomes 0% within the non-linear gap.

• Calculation is made with the gain as “1” if the deviation is out of the non-linear control gap width (GW). (*)

*: An output having an offset with respect to deviation (E) is produced.

TI PBSV

PV

Proportional gainMV

1+TD

Non-linear element's output

E

Non-linear element

–

+

++

0172E.ai

Non-linear PID Control Function Block Diagram


1-118 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Examples of Usage(1) Follow-up capability with respect to setpoint (SV) changes Non-linear PID control is used to limit overshoots. Presetting a smaller proportional band (PB) enables follow-up capability to be

obtained with respect to setpoint (SV) change. If a deviation falls within the non-linear control gap width (GW), the output is limited by the action of the non-linear control gain (GG).

Linear PID control

Time Time

SV

PV

Non-linear PID control

SV

PV

0173E.ai

Response of Non-linear PID Control Made When Setpoint (SV) is Changed

(2) Limiting noise or periodic pulsation For the control of a noisy flow system, if the deviation (E) is small, the gain is low;

the displacement of the control valve is smoothed, enabling the process to stabilize. If the deviation (E) is large, the action of the proportional band (PB) that has been

preset to a small value delivers strong pull-back effects, improving responsiveness.

40

100

0

60

80

Linear PID control

Time

40

100

0

60

80Flow rate


Time

Flow rate

0174E.ai

Effects of Non-linear PI Control on a Noisy Flow System


1-119IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1(3) Averaging level control Use of non-linear PID control enables a uniform outflow rate to be obtained that is

not susceptible to minute variations in liquid level caused by splashes, turbulence, boiling, etc.

For example, it is desirable for a surge tank that the rate of outflow from a manufacturing process (level control’s manipulated output variable) is stabilized rather than achieving precise level control.

Non-linear PI control protects the outflow rate from being affected by minute variations in the liquid level.

+

–

0

100

0

Liquid level

Time

Outflow

rate

%

Rate of outflowManufacturing process

SV

0175E.ai

Averaging Level Control and Control Characteristics

(4) Neutralization control It is difficult for linear PID control to achieve neutralization control because the acid

base titration characteristic gain is higher at about pH7, but is lower at either end of it.

In contrast, non-linear PID control has a gain characteristic inverse to the acid base titration characteristic, enabling constant closed loop gain to be obtained over a wide range. Thus, non-linear PID control achieves stable control.

Neutralization control

pH transmitter

Neutralization solution

Liquid to be controlled

Linear PID control

pH7(SV)

PV PV


Time Time

0176E.ai

Neutralization Control


1-120 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Setting Details


CNT1, CNT2 Control type PID, PD Tuning Display > Engineering Display > [CONFIG2] (Configuration Display 2) ALG1, ALG2 Control operation

formula PI-D, I-PD, SVF

The CNT2 and ALG2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable mode. For PD setpoint: see 1.2.4, Performing Stable Control in Which a Setpoint is not Exceeded

(Proportional (PD) Control), in this manual. For PI-D setpoint: see 1.2.2, Performing Control with Emphasis on Setpoint Follow-up (PV





GW1, GW2 Non-linear control gap width 0.0 to 100.0% Tuning Display > [PID1] (PID Setting

Display 1) or [PID2] (PID Setting Display 2) GG1, GG2 Non-linear control gain 0.000 to 1.000

The GW2 and GG2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable mode.


1-121IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

11.2.8 Performing Control Canceling out Disturbance (Feedforward Control)

Description

Using only the feedback control results in a delay in recovery of the control target to normal status because corrective action occurs only when the effects of disturbance appear on a process variable (PV). If disturbance can be measured, a correction signal with respect to the disturbance can be applied in advance to the controller’s manipulated output (MV) to cancel out the disturbance before it affects the control target. This is called feedforward control or feedforward compensation. It is generally used in combination with feedback control.

Operation description The multi-function mode provides parameters that perform gain operation (feedforward gain (FGN)) and bias operation (feedforward input bias (FBI) and feedforward output bias (FBO)) for a disturbance measurement input signal (feedforward input (FIN)).

The loop 1’s manipulated output variable (MV) in the single-loop mode (SINGLE) or cascade mode (CAS) is:

0177E.ai

MV=MVc+FF

•FIN+FBI +FBOMV=FGN

1+FLG•S1

where MV: manipulated output, MVc: feedback control’s manipulated output, S: Laplacian operator, FIN: feedforward input, and FLG: feedforward first-order lag time constant Feedforward input (FIN) is 1 to 5 V / 0 to 100%.

Principle of feedforward control

PID Gp–

+

–

+

SV

PV

MVControl target

Gf

MVc

FF

Gd

++

YS1700YS1500

FIN

D

0178E.ai

Legend MVc: manipulated output before feedforward compensation, SV: setpoint, PV: process variable, D: disturbance, FF: feedforward input value, FIN: feedforward input, Gf: feedforward element with respect to disturbance (D), Gp: process transfer function (control target), Gd: transfer function with respect to the process variable (PV) of disturbance (D)

0179E.ai

PV=(MVc–Gf•D)Gp+Gd•D=MVc•Gp+(Gd–Gf•Gp)D

Holding Gf = Gd/Gp enables compensation of the effects of disturbance (D).


1-122 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Examples of usage (1) Improving heat exchanger controllability For simple heat exchanger control, the addition of feedforward control enables

compensation to be made for variations in the inflow rate.

Gf

TIC

+ +

Product

Temperature Heating medium

YS1700YS1500

Inflow rate (feedforward signal)

Heat exchanger

Improvement in heat exchanger controllability

0180E.ai

Heat Exchanger Control

(2) Neutralization control Neutralization control is difficult to achieve due to long reaction times. However,

the addition of feedforward control enables variations in the flow rate of processing water, and compensation of its composition (pH value).

Neutralization control

Gain and bias

YS1700YS1500

+ +

pH transmitter

Neutralizer

Inflow rate (FF signal)


PVSV

0181E.ai

Neutralization Control


1-123IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1Setting Details


CNT1, CNT2 Control type PID, PDTuning Display > Engineering Display > [CONFIG2] (Configuration Display 2) ALG1, ALG2


PI-D, I-PD, SVF

The CNT2 and ALG2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable mode. For PD setpoint: see 1.2.4, Performing Stable Control in Which a Setpoint is not Exceeded

(Proportional (PD) Control), in this manual. For PI-D setpoint: see 1.2.2, Performing Control with Emphasis on Setpoint Follow-up (PV





FSW Feedforward gain operation OFF: Not used

ON: Used

Tuning Display > Engineering Display > [CONFIG3] (Configuration Display 3) FON Addition of feedforward

output


FF1 Feedforward input value 1 −100.0 to 200.0% Tuning Display > [PID1] (PID Setting Display 1)

FGN Feedforward gain −8.000 to 8.000Tuning Display > [PARAMETER] (PARAMETER Setting Display)

FBI Feedforward input bias −106.3 to 106.3%

FBO Feedforward output bias −800.0 to 800.0%

FLG Feedforward lag time constant 0.0 to 800.0 sec


1-124 IM 01B08B02-02EN

1.2.9 Controlling a Process with Long Dead Time (Sample-and-hold PI Control)

Description

Sample-and-hold PI control (S-PI) performs PI control for a sample PI sampled time (STMn) only during the first sample-and-hold PI control time span (SWDn). It subsequently holds a manipulated output variable (MV) when that time elapses.This control is useful for processes with long dead times where the results of the manipulated output variable (MV) are not quickly reflected on the process variable (PV). It is also provided with non-linear PID control function.

Point A (where control starts)↑

SV

MV

Time

STM

SWD

STM

PV

Output held

Integral action PB + TI

Output held

0182E.ai

Legend MV: manipulated output variable, SV: setpoint, and PV: process variableAction of Sample-and-hold PI Control (S-PI)

To reduce overshoots, it is better to lengthen the sample PI sampled time (STM). This results however in the settling time becoming longer. If the shortest cycle (TN) of the main disturbance imposed on process is smaller than the sample PI sampled time (STM), that disturbance cannot be controlled. A guideline is approximately STM ≤ TN/5.

The table below shows the operation resulting when the operation mode is switched.

Operation Mode Transition Operation in Each Operation Mode

(C)(CAS) → (A) Performs control continuing the sample PI sampled time (STM).

(C)(CAS) → (M) Resets sample PI sampled time (STM).

(C)(CMP)(SPC) → – Changes the operation mode in the same way as in the (CAS) mode. (C)(CMP)(DDC) → –

(C) → –In cases where the (C) mode is not used, to prevent inadvertent operation the operation mode does not change even if the “C” mode key is pressed.

(A) → (C) Starts control from point A in the figure above.

(A) → (M) Resets sample PI sampled time (STM).

(M) → (C)Switching directly from (M) to (C) is not possible. (In this case, change the mode to (A) and then switch from (A) to (C)). It is, however, possible in the (DDC) mode.

(M) → (A) Starts control from point A in the figure above.

* If the sample PI sampled time (STNn) or sample-and-hold PI control time span (SWDn) is changed, sample-and-hold PI control immediately switches to the changed value and continues operation.

* For the meaning of the (M), (A), (C), (CAS), (CMP), (SPC), and (DDC) symbols, see 1.1, Selecting the Controller Mode (CTL).


1-125IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1Setting Details


CNT1, CNT2 Control type S-PITuning Display > Engineering Display > [CONFIG2] (Configuration Display 2) ALG1, ALG2


PI-D, I-PD, SVF






STM1, STM2 Sample PI sampled time 0 to 9999 sec. Tuning Display > Engineering Display >

[SMPL & BATCH] (Sample & Batch Setting Display) or [SMPL] (Sample Setting Display)SWD1, SWD2 Sample-and-hold PI

control time span 0 to 9999 sec.

The STM2 and SWD2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade, or programmable mode.


1-126 IM 01B08B02-02EN

1.2.10 Performing Control with Rapidly Settling Setpoints (Batch PID Control (YS1700 Programmable Mode Only))

Description

Batch PID control is useful for cases where control is performed causing the PV to settle to a setpoint (SV) as quickly as possible without overshooting. If a deviation (E) exceeding a batch PID deviation setting value (BD) occurs, the controller outputs the high limit setpoint of MV (MH) to quickly bring the process variable (PV) to the setpoint (SV). In the case of reverse action, if a deviation (E) falls within the batch PID deviation setting value (BD), the controller determines that the process is in a steady state and changes to PID control. Upon changing to PID control, the controller starts to output from MV = MH − BB to avoid an overshoot in the process variable (PV). where batch PID bias (BB): Amount of output pulled back If the deviation (E) exceeds the batch PID deviation setting value (BD) after the controller has switched to PID control, no high limit setpoint of MV (MH) will be output unless the deviation exceeds the batch PID lock-up width (BL). Moreover, in the case of direct action, the controller outputs the low limit setpoint of MV (ML) instead of the high limit setpoint of MV (MH), making the batch PID bias (BB) act in the positive direction.

MH outputMH output PID control output

BDBLBDSV

Time

PV

(M) (A)

Start of batch PID control

BB

MV

MHBB

Occurrence of disturbance0183E.ai

Legend MV: manipulated output variable, MH: high limit setpoint of MV, SV: setpoint, and PV: process variable Action of Batch PID Control (BATCH)

Setting Details


CNT1, CNT2 Control type BATCHTuning Display > Engineering Display > [CONFIG2] (Configuration Display 2) ALG1, ALG2


PI-D, I-PD, SVF

For PI-D setpoint: see 1.2.2, Performing Control with Emphasis on Setpoint Follow-up (PV Derivative Type PID (PI-D)), in this manual.

For I-PD setpoint: see 1.2.1, Performing Stable Control without Abrupt Output Changes (PV Proportional Type PID (I-PD)), in this manual.

For SVF setpoint: see 1.2.6, Performing Stable Control for the Step Response of Setpoints (Adjustable Setpoint Filter), in this manual.


1-127IM 01B08B02-02EN

Control Function

1Parameter Name Setting Range Display Transition and Display Title

BD1, BD2 Batch PID deviation setting value 0.0 to 100.0% Tuning Display > Engineering Display

> [SMPL & BATCH] (Sample & Batch Setting Display) or [SMPL] (Sample Setting Display)

BB1, BB2 Batch PID bias 0.0 to 100.0%

BL1, BL2 Batch PID lock-up width 0.0 to 100.0%

1.2.11 Performing Control Switching Multiple PID Parameters (Preset PID (YS1700 Programmable Mode Only))

Description

In preset PID, eight sets of PID parameters are set in advance to the preset PID table. PID parameters meeting the process conditions are selected from these parameters using user programs which are set to two control elements. For user programs: see YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700 Programmable Function User’s

Manual.

Setting Details


CNT1, CNT2 Control type PID, S-PI, BATCH, PDTuning Display > Engineering Display > [CONFIG2] (Configuration Display 2) ALG1, ALG2


PI-D, I-PD, SVF






Blank Page

2-1IM 01B08B02-02EN

Auxiliary C

ontrol Function

2

2.1 Compensating or Computing Process Variables (Multi-function Mode Only)

2.1.1 Input Filter (First-order Lag Operation)

Description

First-order lag operation is performed on each analog input. This function is used if there are significant variations in the display value such as the presence of noise. The greater the time constant, the stronger the filtering function.

Input Example of filtering for 2 seconds

Example of filtering for 10 seconds

0201E.ai

Setting Details


PLG1, PLG2 First-order lag time constant for PV 0.0 to 800.0 sec Tuning Display > [PARAMETER] (Parameter Setting Display)

CLG1, CLG2 First-order lag time constant for CSV 0.0 to 800.0 sec

FLG (*1) Feedforward lag time constant 0.0 to 800.0 sec

TLG Tracking input lag time constant 0.0 to 800.0 sec

*1: Available in the loop 1 in the single-loop mode or cascade mode. The PLG2 and CLG2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade or selector mode.

2.1.2 Square Root Extraction (Low Cutoff Adjustable)

Description

Square root extraction is performed on a process variable (PV) and cascade setting value (CSV). The input and output characteristics are that input = output at the low cutoff point or below. There is no hysteresis.

Low cutoff adjustable

Output = input

Output

Input

0202E.ai

Square Root Extraction Characteristics

Chapter 2 Auxiliary Control Function

2-2 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Setting Details


PSR1, PSR2 Square root extraction for PV OFF: Without square root extraction ON: With square root extraction

Tuning Display > Engineering Display > [CONFIG3] (Configuration Display 3)

PLC1, PLC2 Square root extraction low cutoff setpoint for PV 0.0 to 100.0% Tuning Display > [PARAMETER]

(Parameter Setting Display)

CSR1, CSR2 Square root extraction for CSV

OFF: Without square root extraction ON: With square root extraction


CLC1, CLC2 Square root extraction low cutoff setpoint for CSV 0.0 to 100.0% Tuning Display > [PARAMETER]

(Parameter Setting Display)

The PSR2, PLC2, CSR2, and CLC2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable mode.

2.1.3 10-segment Linearizer Function Description

Non-linear process variables (PV) can be linearized by 10-segment linearizer function conversion. Output can be arbitrarily set to each of 10 equally divided points between 0.0 to 100.0% input (process variable (PV)). For input (process variable (PV)) ≤ 0%, conversion is made by the extension characteristic of the 0 to 10% section line segment. For 100% ≤ input (process variable (PV)) < 106.3%, conversion is made by the extension characteristic of the 90 to 100% section line segment. Input (process variable (PV)) will be limited to between −6.3 to 106.3%.

0 10 20 1009030

10% setpoint

20% setpoint

30% setpoint

90% setpoint

100% setpoint

%

106.3-6.3

......

......

0203E.ai

10-segment Linearizer Function Conversion

Setting Details


FX1, FX2 10-segment linearizer function for PV

OFF: Without 10- segment linearizer functionON: With 10-segment linearizer function


101 to 111201 to 211 10-segment function table 0.000 to 1.000 Tuning Display > Engineering Display > [FX TABLE]

(FX Table Setting Display) The FX2 and 201 to 211 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable mode.


2-3IM 01B08B02-02EN

Auxiliary C

ontrol Function

2

2.1.4 Ratio Operation

Description

Ratio operation can be performed for cascade setting value (CSV) using the following operation formula.

CSV=CGN(CIN+CBI)+CBO0204E.ai

where CSV: cascade setting value, CIN: cascade setting input If ratio operation is performed, control operation is carried out with the operation results (cascade setting value (CSV)) as the setpoint (SV).

Setting Details


CSW1, CSW2 Ratio operation for CSV

OFF: Without ratio operation ON: With ratio operation


CGN1, CGN2 Ratio gain for CSV −8.000 to 8.000 Tuning Display > [PARAMETER] (Parameter Setting Display)

CBI1, CBI2 Ratio input bias for CSV −106.3 to 106.3%

CBO1, CBO2 Ratio output bias for CSV −800.0 to 800.0%

The CSW2, CGN2, CBI2, and CBO2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable mode.


2-4 IM 01B08B02-02EN

2.2 Using the Tracking Function (Multi-function Mode Only)

2.2.1 Output Tracking Description

Output tracking is the function of switching the manipulated output (MV) from the control operation output performed in the controller to a tracking input (X3) signal. When a digital input (DI) signal is received in automatic control (A) or cascade setting automatic control (C) status, the manipulated output variable (MV) is changed to a tracking input value (X3). Moreover, switching from control operation output to a tracking input (X3) occurs immediately, while switching from a tracking input (X3) to control operation output occurs beginning with the tracking input (X3) value during switching. Thus, switching is bumpless. A tracking input (X3) signal in the multi-function mode is an input from the X3 terminal that has been filtered (tracking input lag time constant (TLG)). Switching operation is performed based on a digital input (DI) signal. The “A” and “C” lamp lighting status does not change. Moreover, [EXT-TRK] is displayed on the LOOP Display’s or METER Display’s control status display section (it does not appear in manual control (M)). In the cascade and selector modes, tracking input is an input from the X4 or X6 terminal. For this, see 1.1.2, Control in the Cascade Mode (CTL = CAS) or 1.1.3, Control in the Selector Mode (CTL = SELECT), in this manual.

Example of usage: Constant blast volume and constant blast pressure control of a blast furnace blower can be bumplessly switched bidirectionally using two controllers as shown below.

Air

Turbine

Blast furnace

Steam

Blower

FICPIC

Flow ratePressure

Hot stove

0205E.ai

Blast Furnace Blower Control

Setting Details

Parameter Name Display Range Display Transition and Display Title

TRK1 Output tracking input value 1 −6.3 to 106.3% Tuning Display > [PID1] (PID

Setting Display 1)

2-5IM 01B08B02-02EN

Auxiliary C

ontrol Function

2

2.2.2 Cascade Setting Value Tracking (Single-loop Mode Only)

Description

When the operation mode is switched to manual control (M), the controller’s internal setpoint tracks a cascade setting value (CSV). When cascade setting automatic control (C) is switched to automatic control (A), or from manual control (M) to automatic control (A), the setpoint (SV) tracks a cascade setting value (CSV).

< >

SV key

(C)(A)

PID

SV PV

(M)

TRKSW=SVTRK

(C),(A)

MV

MV key

PVCSV

(M)

TRKSW=–

0206E.ai

Cascade Setting Value Tracking (SVTRK)

Setting Details


TRKSWSelection of tracking function

−: Without tracking function SVTRK: SV tracking


CSV1 Cascade setting value

Equivalent to −6.3 to 106.3% in the engineering unit

Tuning Display > [PID1] (PID Setting Display 1)


2-6 IM 01B08B02-02EN

2.2.3 Process Variable Tracking (Single-loop Mode Only)

Description

When manual control (M) is switched to automatic control (A), if a deviation (E) becomes large, variations in the manipulated output (MV) also become significant (especially, in the case of PV derivative PID (PI-D) control). To prevent this, the setpoint (SV) should be matched with the process variable (PV) during manual control (M), so that an abrupt adjustment action does not occur when the operation mode is switched to automatic control (A). When the operation mode is switched from manual control (M) to automatic control (A), a setpoint (SV) tracks the process variable (PV).

SV key

(C)(A)

PIDSV PV

(M)

TRKSW=PVTRK

(C),(A)MV key

PVCSV

(M)

TRKSW=–

< >

0207E.ai

Process Variable Tracking (PVTRK)

Setting Details


TRKSWSelection of tracking function

−: Without tracking function PVTRK: PV tracking



2-7IM 01B08B02-02EN

Auxiliary C

ontrol Function

2

2.3 Changing the Control Operation Direction and Valve Direction

Description

The control operation direction is as shown below:

Direct action

Deviation (PV – SV)

0 %

100 %

– +

Manipulated output

Reverse action

0208E.ai

The valve direction determines “C – O” or “O – C” displayed on the LCD. If the control operation direction is reverse action, the manipulated output variable increases when PV < SV, and decreases when PV > SV.If the control operation direction is direct action, the manipulated output variable acts conversely.

Setting Details


ACT1, ACT2 Control operation direction

RVS: Reverse action DIR: Direct action

Tuning Display > Engineering Display > [CONFIG2] (Configuration Display 2) VDIR1, VDIR2 Valve direction

C–O: MV0% = C 100% = O

O–C: MV0% = O 100% = C

The ACT2 parameter is used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable mode. The VDIR2 parameter is used for the loop 2 in the programmable mode.

2-8 IM 01B08B02-02EN

2.4 Using Preset MV

Description

When receiving a digital input signal in the automatic control or cascade control status, YS1000 outputs a preset output value that is set in advance to a manipulated output. Manual operation is not available. When the digital input signal is cleared, operation returns to the original condition. In the preset MV output status, [EXT-PMV] is displayed on the LOOP or METER Display. The “A” and “C” mode key lamp statuses do not change. Preset output can be set to 0% or below for use in an emergency shutdown in the event of process abnormality, etc.

Setting Details


PMV1, PMV2 Preset output −6.3 to 106.3% Tuning Display > [PID1] (PID Setting Display 1) or [PID2] (PID Setting Display 2)

The PMV2 parameter is used for the loop 2 in the programmable mode.

2-9IM 01B08B02-02EN

Auxiliary C

ontrol Function

2

2.5 Using the Event Function

2.5.1 Displaying Messages (Event Display Function (Settable Only in YSS1000)

Description

The event display function displays a message (in Japanese, English, or Chinese) on the Operation Display if an event such as an abnormality occurs, providing guidance for the operator. A maximum of five events can be set using the YSS1000 Setting Software (sold separately). Events will be displayed on all Operation Displays. The display area is 200 × 80 dots, with 50 × 80 dots of that used to display a clearing guide. If multiple events occur simultaneously, they are displayed in an overlaid condition. The order of priority is (high) event 1 > 2 > 3 > 4 > 5 (low), and the event with the highest priority is displayed on top. The event being displayed can be cleared by pressing and holding the SHIFT key for three seconds. Moreover, events can be redisplayed on Alarm Display. For how to redisplay events: see “Monitoring and Operating the Alarm Display” in the YS1500

Indicating Controller/YS1700 Programmable Indicating Controller Operation Guide.

Set using the YSS1000 Setting Software

Clearing guide display (fixed display)

Events are overlaid for display if multiple events occur simultaneously.

0209E.ai

Only foreground event is cleared.

Press and hold the SHIFT key

for three seconds

Press and hold the SHIFT key

for three seconds

SHIFT

0210E.ai

SHIFT

2-10 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Event flag The status register is the flag to indicate an event. An event is displayed if the status register changes from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0. Process alarm such as a high limit alarm and operation mode can be registered as a flag.

Simulation Display After downloading the event display dada from YSS1000, the event can be displayed forcibly. Simulation display can be set when operation is stopped. To cancel simulation display: (1) Turn OFF simulation display on YSS1000. (2) Change the operation stop status from stopped to operating. (3) Turn the power supply OFF and then ON.

Deletion Guide Display Language

0211E-01.ai

English


2-11IM 01B08B02-02EN

Auxiliary C

ontrol Function

2

2.5.2 Changing the PV Bar Display Color in the Event of a Process Alarm (Active Color Display Function)

Description

The active color display function changes the colors of the PV bar on the LOOP Display to red to inform the operator of instrument abnormality. Active color display can be set on a loop basis and items can be selected from each loop’s process alarms (see the table below).

Occurrence of event

Loop 1 active display

0211E.ai

Setting Details


ACTD1Active color display selection 1

OFF: Without active display function (default) PH1: High limit alarm for PV 1 PL1: Low limit alarm for PV 1HH1: High-high limit alarm for PV 1LL1: Low-low limit alarm for PV 1DL1: Deviation-1 alarm VL1: Velocity alarm for PV 1 DL1VL1: Deviation 1 alarm or velocity alarm for PV1 1-ALM: Logical OR of all loop 1 alarms

Tuning Display > Engineering Display > [DISPLAY] (Setting Display for Operation Display)

ACTD2Active color display selection 2

OFF: Without active display function (default) PH2: High limit alarm for PV 2 PL2: Low limit alarm for PV 2HH2: High-high limit alarm for PV 2LL2: Low-low limit alarm for PV 2DL2: Deviation 2 alarm VL2: Velocity alarm for PV 2 DL2VL2: Deviation 2 alarm or velocity alarm for PV 2 2-ALM: Logical OR of all loop 2 alarms

The ACTD2 parameter is used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable mode.


2-12 IM 01B08B02-02EN

2.5.3 Operator Notification Using Tag Number Display (Alternate Tag Number Color Display Function)

Description

In the event of an ALM lamp lighting, the alternate tag number color display function notifies the operator of instrument abnormality by alternating the color of the tag number background and red. For lighting of ALM lamp: see “How to Take Actions if the ALM Lamp or FAIL Lamp Lights up ” in

the YS1500 Indicating Controller/YS1700 Programmable Indicating Controller Operation Guide.

Alternate tag number color display

Event occurrence

0212E.ai

Setting Details


TAGALColor inversion of tag number

OFF: DisabledON: Enabled



2-13IM 01B08B02-02EN

Auxiliary C

ontrol Function

2

2.6 Setting the Alarm Function

Selecting the multi-function mode (from among single-loop, cascade, or selector mode) allows an alarm function to be automatically assigned to digital outputs. For digital output function in the multi-function mode: see 1.1.1, Control in the Single-loop Mode,

1.1.2, Control in the Cascade Mode, and 1.1.3, Control in the Selector Mode, in this manual. For setting the alarm function: see 3.1.5, Change the Digital Output Functions, in this manual.

2-14 IM 01B08B02-02EN

2.7 Setting Alarm Output Hysteresis

Description

The HYS1 parameter operates in common on alarms in the loop 1, while the HYS2 parameter operates in common on alarms in the loop 2. Setting hysteresis (differential gap) to alarm action prevents chattering in digital output.

PV

ClosedOpen

Closed

For an example in the figure above, the contact type is such that the contact opens if an event occurs (factory default).

Alarm hysteresis (HYSn)

Alarm hysteresis (HYSn)

Open

Time

High limit alarm setpoint for PV

Low limit alarm setpoint for PV

High limit alarm output for PV

Low limit alarm output for PV

0213E.ai

Setting Details


HYS1, HYS2 Alarm hysteresis

Engineering unit equivalent to between 0.0 to 20.0%

Tuning Display > [PID1] (PID Setting Display 1) or [PID2] (PID Setting Display 2)

The HYS2 parameter is used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable mode.

3-1IM 01B08B02-02EN

Auxiliary Input and O

utput Functions

3

3.1 Defining Digital Input and Output Functions (Multi-function Mode Only)

The digital input (DI) terminals and digital output (DO) terminals of the YS1000 are shared. The expandable I/O terminal of the basic type of YS1700 (with expandable I/O) is dedicated terminal. When the multi-function mode (single loop, cascade, or selector mode) is selected, functions are automatically assigned to the digital input and output terminals. Functions can be assigned as needed to any terminals not provided with a function. For digital input and output functions in the multi-function mode: see “Installation and Wiring” in

the YS1500 Indicating Controller/YS1700 Programmable Indicating Controller Operation Guide or Chapter 1, Control Function, in this manual.

See 3.1.1.

See 3.1.2 for using them as DI. See 3.1.3 for using them as DO.

See 3.1.4 for using them as DI. See 3.1.5 for using them as DO.

Change functions of digital input and output terminals

Determine contact types

Determine whether to use the terminals as

DI or DO

Determine functions

End

0301E.ai

Chapter 3 Auxiliary Input and Output Functions

3-2 IM 01B08B02-02EN

3.1.1 Switching Digital Terminals between Input and Output

Description

The table below shows YS1000’s digital input and output terminal numbers and the target parameters. Setting DI to a parameter enables the terminals concerned to be used as digital input; setting DO to a parameter enables them to be used as digital output. For factory defaults of digital inputs and outputs: see “Installation and Wiring” in the YS1500

Indicating Controller/YS1700 Programmable Indicating Controller Operation Guide

Terminal Numbers Application Parameter Factory Default

Nos. 38 – 39 Used as DI1 or DO6. DIO16 DI (used as DI1)

Nos. 36 – 37 Used as DI2 or DO5. DIO25 DO (used as DO5)





Setting Details


DIO16 DI1/DO6 Specification

DI: Used as digital input DO: Used as digital output

Tuning Display > Engineering Display > [DI/DO] (DI/DO Setting Display)






3.1.2 Switching Digital Input Contact Type

Description

Operation according to the opening/closing of digital input contacts is as shown below. If the computer cascade setting mode (SPC mode or DDC mode) has been activated, the operation mode cannot be switched by digital input.

Setpoint Operation

OPNThe operation mode changes to the one specified if digital input is switched from “Close” to “Open.” The operation mode is assigned as described in 3.1.4 Changing Digital Input Functions.

CLS Operation is the reverse of the above.


3-3IM 01B08B02-02EN


utput Functions

3

Setting Details


DI1D DI1 contact type

OPN: Function is enabled if the contact concerned is open (factory default).

CLS: Function is enabled if the contact concerned is closed.







DI7D DI7 contact type (*1)




*1: DI7D, DI8D, DI9D, and DI10D are available only when using the YS1700 basic type (with expandable I/O).

3.1.3 Switching Digital Output Contact Type

Description

The opening/closing action of the digital output is as shown below.

Setpoint Operation

OPN Digital output changes from “Close” to “Open” if an event occurs. Each event is assigned as described in 3.1.5 Changing Digital Output Functions.

CLS Operation is the reverse of the above.

Setting Details


DO1D DO1 contact type

OPN: The contact concerned opens if an event occurs

CLS: The contact concerned closes if an event occurs.

(*2)







DO7D DO7 contact type (*1)




*1: DO7D, DO8D, DO9D, and DO10D are available only when using the YS1700 basic type (with expandable I/O).

*2: Factory default DO1D to DO3D : OPN DO4D to DO5D : CLS DO6D to DO10D : OPN


3-4 IM 01B08B02-02EN

3.1.4 Changing Digital Input Functions

Description

The following describes digital input operations. The operation described below is the case where the digital input contact type is open (OPN). To use reverse operation, change the contact type from open (OPN) to close (CLS). The factory default has no functions assigned to the digital inputs. For contact type: see 3.1.2 Switching Digital Input Contact Type, in this manual.

(1) Automatic switching (E-AUT) YS1000 changes to automatic control when a digital input signal is received in the cascade setting automatic control. During transition to automatic control, [EXT-AUT] is displayed on the Operation Display. The “C” lamp remains lit . The “A” lamp blinks. When the digital input signal is cleared, the YS1000 returns to the original cascade setting automatic control. Automatic switching (E-AUT) cannot be simultaneously used.When the parameter CMOD1 is set to CMP, Automatic switching (E-AUT) cannot be used.

Function Operation ModeDigital (Voltage Level) Input

Contact Close (Low) Contact Open (High)

Automatic switching (E-AUT)

C

Setpoint Cascade setpoint Local setpoint

Operation status Automatic control

Status display No display [EXT-AUT]

A Always automatic control

M Always manual control

(2) Manual switching (E-MAN) YS1000 changes to manual control when a digital input signal is received in the automatic control or cascade setting automatic control status. During transition to manual control, [EXT-MAN] is displayed on the Operation Display. The “A” or “C” lamps remain lit. The “M” lamp blinks. When the digital input signal is cleared, the YS1000 returns to the original operation mode. Manual switching (E-MAN) cannot be simultaneously used.When the parameter CMOD1 is set to CMP, manual switching (E-MAN) cannot be used.



Manual switching (E-MAN)

C

Setpoint Cascade setpoint Local setpoint

Operation status Automatic control Manual control

Status display No display [EXT-MAN]

A

Setpoint Local setpoint

Operation status Automatic control Manual control

Status display No display [EXT-MAN]



3-5IM 01B08B02-02EN


utput Functions

3

(3) Preset MV switching (E-PMV) YS1000 outputs a preset MV value to a manipulated output variable when a digital input signal is received in the automatic control or cascade setting automatic control status. Manual operation is not possible (to do manual operation, it is necessary to switch to manual control.) When the digital input signal is cleared, the YS1000 returns to the original automatic control or cascade setting automatic control. In the preset MV output condition, [EXT-PMV] is displayed on the Operation Display. The “A” or “C” lamps remain lit . The preset MV value can be set to 0% or less to be used for emergency shutdown in the event of a process abnormality, etc. Preset MV is limited to the output limiter. For preset MV: see 2.4 Using Preset MV, in this manual.



Preset MV switching (E-PMV)

C

Setpoint Cascade setpoint

Operation status Automatic control A preset MV is output.

Status display No display [EXT-PMV]

A


Operation status Automatic control A preset MV is output.

Status display No display [EXT-PMV]


(4) Output tracking switching (E-TRK) YS1000 functions in the same way as in the case of a preset MV. However, the MV value output at switching is an external analog input value. For output tracking: see 2.2.1 Output Tracking, in this manual.



Output tracking switching (E-TRK)

C

Setpoint Cascade setpoint

Operation status Automatic control Output tracking

Status display No display [EXT-TRK]

A


Operation status Automatic control Output tracking

Status display No display [EXT-TRK]


(5) Output preset and manual switching (TR-MPMV) YS1000 simultaneously changes to “preset MV switching” and “manual switching” operations when a digital input signal is received in automatic control or cascade setting automatic control. Output preset and manual switching (TR-MPMV) is not operate in the manual control. Preset MV is limited to the output limiter.


3-6 IM 01B08B02-02EN

(6) Self-tuning switching (E-STC) When the digital input signal is received, the self-tuning function works according to the STC mode selection parameter (STC). YS1000 stops the self-tuning function when a digital input signal is cleared. For self-tuning function: see Chapter 7, Self-tuning Function, in this manual.

Function Digital (Voltage Level) Input


Self-tuning switching (E-STC) STC function stopped STC function started

(7) Cascade open/close switching (E-O/C) Cascade open/close switching is available in the cascade mode. When a digital input signal is received, YS1000 enters the (internal) cascade open status (loop 1 disconnected), activating loop 2 control. When the digital input signal is cleared, the YS1000 enters the (internal) cascade close status. [OPEN] or [CLOSE] is displayed on the Operation Display, indicating the open/close status.



Open/close switching (E-O/C) (Internal) cascade close (Internal) cascade open

(8) Loop 2 local/remote switching (E-L/R) Loop 2 remote/local switching is available in the selector mode. When a digital input signal is received, loop 2’s setpoint is switched to Local. When the digital input signal is cleared, loop 2’s setpoint changes to Remote, using an external cascade setpoint. In this case, [SV2-LCL] or [SV2-RMT] indicating the local/remote status of loop 2’s setpoint is displayed on the Operation Display.



Local/remote switching (E-L/R) Remote Local

(9) Selector selection (E-SEL) When a digital input signal is received, loop 1’s computation results are output. When the digital input signal is cleared, the computation results are output according to the ATSEL autoselector selection parameter.



Selector selection (E-SEL) Autoselector selection Loop 1’s computation results are selected.


3-7IM 01B08B02-02EN


utput Functions

3

(10) LCD backlight off (LCD-OFF) When a digital input signal is switched from "Close" to "Open", YS1000 turns off the LCD backlight (if contact type is open (OPN)). When the digital input signal is switched from "Open" to "Close", the LCD backlight turns on.If any front panel key is pressed once while the LCD backlight is OFF, it will be turned ON again.

(11) Manual switching (TR-MAN), automatic switching (TR-AUT), and cascade switching (TR-CAS)

In automatic switching (E-AUT) or manual switching (E-MAN), operation switches according to the status (open or close status). However, manual switching (TR-MAN), automatic switching (TR-AUT), or cascade switching (TR-CAS) functions when a digital input signal changes from open to close or from close to open. When the controller mode is cascade or selector mode, loop1's mode is changed.

(12) Output loop selection (E-LPSEL)When the digital input signal (DI) is "Open", the computation results of Loop 2 are output.When the digital input signal (DI) is "Close", the computation results of Loop 1 are output.(When the contact type is OPN)The auto selector does not operate.


Contact Close (Low) Contact Open (High) Output loop selection (E-LPSEL)

Loop 1’s computation results are selected.

Loop 2’s computation results are selected.

(13) All event elimination (TR-EVT.C)When a digital input signal (DI) is switched from "Close" to "Open", all the displayed events are cleared.For all other cases, events are displayed when the display conditions are met.After the event display is cleared, if the digital input signal (DI) remains "Open", when an event display condition is met, the corresponding event (1 to 5) is displayed.(When the contact type is OPN)

Type Operation Description Function

Status

CLOSE

OPENOPEN0301-01E.ai

When a digital input signal is received, the specified operation occurs. When the digital input signal is cleared, the original condition returns.

E-AUT, E-MAN, E-O/C, E-L/R, E-PMV, E-STC, E-SEL, E-TRK

Trigger

Control period + 20 ms

CLOSE

OPENOPEN

0301-02E.ai

When a digital input signal is received, the specified operation occurs. The digital input’s minimum detection time is the control period + 20 ms. The control period is fixed at 100 ms.

TR-MAN, TR-AUT, TR-CAS, TR-MPMV, LCD-OFF (*1)

*1: LCD-OFF function operates by the rising edge and the falling edge.


3-8 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Setting Details


DI1F DI1 function selection NONE: No function assigned E-AUT: Switching to Automatic mode (status) E-MAN: Switching to Manual mode (status) E-O/C: Open/Close switching (*2) E-L/R: Local/Remote switching (*3) E-PMV: Preset MV switching E-STC: STC start E-SEL: Selector selection (*3) TR-MPMV: Output preset and manual switching TR-MAN: Manual switching (trigger) TR-AUT: Automatic switching (trigger) TR-CAS: Cascade switching (trigger) LCD-OFF: LCD backlight OFF E-TRK: Output tracking E-LPSEL: Output loop selection (*3)TR-EVT.C: All event elimination


DI2F DI2 function selection





DI7F DI7 function selection (*1)




*1: DI7F, DI8F, DI9F, and DI10F are available only when using the YS1700 basic type (with expandable I/O).

*2: E-O/C can only be selected in the (internal) cascade mode. *3: E-L/R, E-SEL and E-LPSEL can only be selected in the selector mode. If E-SEL is set, the

SSW parameter setting becomes invalid.


3-9IM 01B08B02-02EN


utput Functions

3

3.1.5 Changing Digital Output Functions

Description

The following describes digital output operations. The operation described below is the case where the digital output contact type is open (OPN). To use reverse operation, change the contact type from open (OPN) to close (CLS). For contact types: see 3.1.3 Switching Digital Output Contact Type, in this manual.

Alarm status output The high limit alarm for PV1 (PH1), low limit alarm for PV1 (PL1), high-high limit alarm for PV1 (HH1), low-low limit alarm for PV1 (LL1), deviation 1 alarm (DL1), velocity alarm for PV1 (VL1), deviation 1 alarm or velocity alarm for PV1 (DL1VL1), and logical OR of all loop 1 alarms (1-ALM) operate in loop 1 in the single loop, cascade, or selector modes. The high limit alarm for PV2 (PH2), the low limit alarm for PV2 (PL2), the high-high limit alarm for PV2 (HH2), the low-low limit alarm for PV2 (LL2), the deviation 2 alarm (DL2), the velocity alarm for PV2 (VL2), the deviation 2 alarm or velocity alarm for PV2 (DL2VL2), and the logical OR of all loop 2 alarms (2-ALM) operate in loop 2 in the cascade or selector modes. The operation of each alarm is described below.

The figure below shows examples of actions of the high limit alarm for PV, the high-high limit alarm for PV, the low limit alarm for PV, the low-low limit alarm for PV, and alarm hysteresis.

PV

0302E.ai

High-high limit alarm output for PV

High limit alarm output for PV

High-high limit alarm setpoint for PV

High limit alarm setpoint for PV

Low limit alarm setpoint for PV

Low-low limit alarm setpoint for PV

Low limit alarm output for PV

Low-low limit alarm output for PV


Time

Alarm hysteresis (HYS)




Closed Open

Closed Open

Closed Open

Closed

Open Closed


3-10 IM 01B08B02-02EN

The figure below shows an example of the actions of a deviation alarm and alarm hysteresis.

PV

Closed ClosedOpenClosed OpenDeviation alarm output

Setpoint (SV)

Time

Deviation alarm setpoint

Deviation alarm setpoint




0303E.ai

The HYS1 alarm hysteresis operates collectively on PH1, PL1, HH1, LL1, and DL1. The HYS2 alarm hysteresis operates collectively on PH2, PL2, HH2, LL2, and DL2.

The figure below shows an example of the actions of a velocity alarm for PV.

PV

0304E.ai

ClosedClosed Open ClosedOpenVelocity alarmoutput for PV

Exceeds the velocityExceeds the velocity

Velocity alarm setpoint

Velocity alarm setpoint

An alarm occurs if the velocity exceeds this inclination.

Velocity alarmtime setpoint

Velocity alarmtime setpoint


Time


3-11IM 01B08B02-02EN


utput Functions

3

Operation mode status outputs in the single loop mode The operation mode is output in two statuses:

Operation Mode (Lamps that light up)

Operation Mode Switching by Digital Input Status Output

Operation Setting Operation Mode Status C, A/M Status Output C/A, M Status Output

C

OFF (designation cancelled) C mode Close Close

Output tracking C mode Close Close

Preset MV output C mode Close Close

Automatic switching A mode Close Open

Manual switching M mode Open Open

A

OFF (designation cancelled) A mode Close Open

Output tracking A mode Close Open

Preset MV output A mode Close Open

Manual switching M mode Open Open

M Always manual control M mode Open Open

Operation mode status output in the cascade mode or selector modes

(1) C, A/M and C/A, M statuses The table below shows the operation mode status output in the cascade and selector modes.

Operation Mode (Lamps That Light up)

Status Output

C, A/M C/A, M

C Close Close

A Close Open

M Open Open

(2) Open/close and remote/local status output In the cascade mode, the (internal) cascade open/close status is output to digital output 3 (DO3). In the selector mode, the remote/local status is output to digital output 3 (DO3). Both status outputs are factory defaults.

• Open/close status output When open, status output = open When closed, status output = close • Remote/local status output When in remote control, status output = close When in local control, status output = open

Y1 and Y3 alarm status outputsThe Y1 and Y3 current output status (OOP alarm) is output.



OOP: Current output open Y1 and Y3 current output are nomal

Y1 or Y3 current output is open

(When the contact type is OPN)


3-12 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Setting Details


DO1F DO1 function selection NONE: No function assigned PH1: High limit alarm for PV1 PL1: Low limit alarm for PV1HH1: High-high limit alarm for PV1 LL1: Low-low limit alarm for PV1DL1: Alarm for deviation variable 1VL1: Velocity alarm for PV1 PH2: High limit alarm for PV2 PL2: Low limit alarm for PV2 HH2: High-high limit alarm for PV2LL2: Low-low limit alarm for PV2DL2: Alarm for deviation variable 2VL2: Velocity alarm for PV2DL1VL1: DL1VL1: Alarm for deviation variable 1/

Velocity alarm for PV1 DL2VL2: DL2VL2: Alarm for deviation variable 2/

Velocity alarm for PV21-ALM: Logical OR of all loop 1 alarms 2-ALM: Logical OR of all loop 2 alarmsCAS: Cascade modeCASAUT: Cascade or Automatic modeO/C: Open/Close (*2) L/R: Remote/Local (*3) OOP: Current output open


DO2F DO2 function selection





DO7F DO7 function selection (*1)




*1: DO7F, DO8F, DO9F, and DO10F are available only when using the YS1700 basic type (with expandable I/O).

*2: O/C can only be selected in the cascade mode. Open/Close indicates connection or disconnection of loop 1 or loop 2.

*3: L/R can only be selected in the selector mode. Remote/Local represents the switching between loop 2’s external and internal setpoints.


3-13IM 01B08B02-02EN


utput Functions

3

3.2 Switching Analog Output 3’s Voltage and Current

Description

Analog output 3’s voltage/current can only be changed in the YS1700 programmable mode.

Setting Details


Y3TP Analog output 3’s current/voltage switching

4 to 20 mA1 to 5 V


3-14 IM 01B08B02-02EN

3.3 Changing the Output Types of Analog Outputs 2, 3 and 4

Description

When the multi-function mode (single-loop, cascade, or selector mode) is selected, functions are assigned to analog outputs 2, 3 and 4. To change an assigned function, use the Y2S, Y3S, or Y4S parameters. For analog output 2, 3 and 4 functions: see “Installation and Wiring” in the YS1500 Indicating

Controller/YS1700 Programmable Indicating Controller Operation Guide

Setting Details


Y2S Analog output 2 selection OFF: No function assigned PV1: Process variable 1SV1: Setpoint value 1PV2: Process variable 2 SV2: Setpoint value 2 MV: Manipulated output variable X1: Analog input 1 X2: Analog input 2 X3: Analog input 3 X4: Analog input 4 X5: Analog input 5 X6: Analog input 6 (*1) X7: Analog input 7 (*1) X8: Analog input 8 (*1)


Y3S Analog output 3 selection

Y4S Analog output 4 selection (*1)

*1: Displayed only when using the YS1700 basic type (with expandable I/O)

4-1IM 01B08B02-02EN

Display and Security Functions

4

4.1 Display Function

4.1.1 Setting Visible/Invisible Status of the Operation Display

Description

There are ten types of Operation Displays. As shown in the table below, the Operation Displays to be used are preset according to the controller mode. Displays you chose not to display can be made invisible.

Operation Display Name Controller Mode

Single-loop Mode Cascade Mode Selector Mode Programmable

Mode LOOP1 (LOOP 1 Display)

LOOP2 (LOOP 2 Display) –

MTR1 (METER 1 Display)

MTR2 (METER 2 Display) –

TRND1 (TREND 1 Display)

TRND2 (TREND 2 Display) –

TRND3 (TREND 3 Display)

ALRM (ALARM Display)

DUAL1 (DUAL 1 Display) –

DUAL2 (DUAL 2 Display) –

Legend : Visible, −: Invisible

Setting Details


LOOP1 LOOP 1 Display ON/OFF

OFF: Invisible ON: Visible (*1)


LOOP2 LOOP 2 Display ON/OFF

MTR1 METER 1 Display ON/OFF

MTR2 METER 2 Display ON/OFF

TRND1 TREND 1 Display ON/OFF



ALARM ALARM Display ON/OFF

DUAL1 DUAL 1 Display ON/OFF

DUAL2 DUAL 2 Display ON/OFF

*1: Even if all the parameters are set to OFF, the LOOP 1 Display is always shown. Set the TREND3 parameter to OFF if TREND Display 3 is not used.

Chapter 4 Display and Security Functions

4-2 IM 01B08B02-02EN

LOOP 1 Display LOOP 2 Display METER 1 Display METER 2 Display

0401E.ai 0402E.ai 0403E.ai 0404E.ai

TREND 1 Display TREND 2 Display TREND 3 Display ALARM Display

0405E.ai 0406E.ai 0407E.ai 0408E.ai

DUAL 1 Display DUAL 2 Display

0409E.ai 0410E.ai


4-3IM 01B08B02-02EN


4

4.1.2 Setting Visible/Invisible Status of TREND Display Data

Description

TREND 1 Display displays PV1, SV1 and MV1, while TREND 2 Display shows PV2, SV2 and MV2. PV trend, SV trend, and MV trends displayed on TREND 1 and TREND 2 Displays can be set to be visible or invisible. It is possible to select the trends that are to be displayed, making only the data necessary to be monitored visible on the Operation Display.

0411E.ai

PV trend display

SV trend display

PV pointer

SV pointer

MV pointerMV trend display

Setting Details


TR1PV PV1 trend ON/OFF of TREND 1 Display

OFF: Invisible ON: Visible (*1)


TR1SV SV1 trend ON/OFF of TREND 1 Display

TR1MV MV1 trend ON/OFF of TREND 1 Display

TR2PV PV2 trend ON/OFF of TREND 2 Display (*1)

TR2SV SV2 trend ON/OFF of TREND 2 Display (*1)

TR2MV MV2 trend ON/OFF of TREND 2 Display (*1)

*1: The TR2PV, TR2SV, and TR2MV parameters are not displayed in the single loop mode.


4-4 IM 01B08B02-02EN

4.1.3 Changing the Time Span of TREND Displays

Description

The time span of trends displayed on the TREND 1, TREND 2, and TREND 3 displays can be set.

0412E.ai

Time span

Setting Details


TRDT1 TREND 1 Display time span1M: 1 minute 5M: 5 minutes 10M: 10 minutes 30M: 30 minutes 1H: 1 hour 5H: 5 hours 10H: 10 hours 30H: 30 hours


TRDT2 TREND 2 Display time span

TRDT3 TREND 3 Display time span

*1: The TRDT2 parameter is used for loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable modes.


4-5IM 01B08B02-02EN


4

4.1.4 Setting Display Data on the TREND 3 Display

Description

Display data shown on the TREND 3 Display can be set arbitrarily. A maximum of four data items can be set. This enables the necessary data to be monitored on the Operation Display.

TREND Display 3

0413E.ai

Data selection 1 pointer of TREND 3 DisplayData selection 2 pointer of TREND 3 DisplayData selection 3 pointer of TREND 3 DisplayData selection 4 pointer of TREND 3 Display

Data selection 1 digital display of TREND 3 DisplayData selection 2 digital display of TREND 3 DisplayData selection 3 digital display of TREND 3 DisplayData selection 4 digital display of TREND 3 Display

Data selection 1 trend display of TREND 3 DisplayData selection 2 trend display of TREND 3 DisplayData selection 3 trend display of TREND 3 DisplayData selection 4 trend display of TREND 3 Display

Setting Details

Parameter Name Setting Range (*1) Display Transition and Display Title

TRDS1 Data selection 1 of TREND 3 Display

OFF: None PV1: Process variable 1SV1: Setpoint value 1MV1: Manipulated output

variable 1 PV2: Process variable 2 SV2: Setpoint value 2 MV2: Manipulated output

variable 2 X1: Input 1X2: Input 2 X3: Input 3X4: Input 4 X5: Input 5 X6: Input 6 (*2) X7: Input 7 (*2) X8: Input 8 (*2) Y1: Output 1 Y2: Output 2 Y3: Output 3 Y4: Output 4 (*2)





*1: X1 to X8 and Y1 to Y4 are values input to or output from the YS1000 terminal block. *2: X6, X7, X8 and Y4 can only be selected when using the YS1700 basic type (with expandable

I/O).


4-6 IM 01B08B02-02EN

4.1.5 Changing Scale Divisions on the LOOP, TREND, and DUAL Displays

Description

The provision of scale divisions is relevant to the LOOP, TREND, and DUAL Displays. For scale divisions on the METER Displays, see 4.1.6 Automatic Scale Divisions/Making Scale Values More Legible on the METER Displays

0414E.ai

Scale divisionThe figure on the left is an example of four scale divisions.

Setting Details


SCDV1 Scale division 1 1, 2, 4, 5, 7, 10, 14, 20

Tuning Display > Engineering Display > [CONFIG2] (Configuration Display 2) SCDV2 Scale division 2

The SCDV2 parameter is used for loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable modes.


4-7IM 01B08B02-02EN


4

4.1.6 Automatic Scale Divisions/Making Scale Values More Legible on the METER Display

Description

For scales on the METER Displays, scale divisions are automatically provided based on the values set to the scale between 0% and 100% values. The number of scale divisions is from a minimum of 11 divisions to a maximum of 20 divisions.

0415E.ai

Scale numbers displayed on the METER Display are also automatically determined from the scale’s 0% to 100% values in the same way as the scale divisions. To improve the legibility of the scale numbers, they can be displayed to the power of 10.

Setting Details


MTMG1 10-exponential scale factor for METER 1 Display

AUTO, 10^-5,10^-4, 10^-3,10^-2,10^-1,10^0,10^1,10^2,10^3,10^4, 10^5,

Tuning Display > Engineering Display > [DISPLAY] (Setting Display for Operation Display) MTMG2 10-exponential scale factor for

METER 2 Display

The MTMG2 parameter is used for loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable modes.


4-8 IM 01B08B02-02EN

4.1.7 Selecting the Operation Display to be Displayed First at Power ON

Description

The Operation Display to be displayed first when the power is turned ON can be set. The figure below shows an example of displaying the TREND 1 Display first.

0416E.ai

Power ON

key key

key

TREND 1 Display LOOP 1 Display METER 1 Display

Setting Details


FDSP Power-on initial display

LOOP1: LOOP 1 Display LOOP2: LOOP 2 Display MTR1: METER 1 Display MTR2: METER 2 Display TRND1: TREND 1 Display TRND2: TREND 2 Display TRND3: TREND 3 Display ALARM: ALARM Display DUAL1: DUAL 1 Display DUAL2: DUAL 2 Display



4-9IM 01B08B02-02EN


4

4.1.8 Turning the LCD Backlight ON/OFF

Description

The backlight OFF function makes it possible to turn off the LCD backlight in cases where the YS1000 is installed in locations where the display is not usually seen or if it desired to turn it off at night. This is an energy-saving feature that extends the life of the display unit.

The LCD backlight can be turned ON/OFF using the following means: (1) Front panel keys (2) OFF timer setting (3) Digital input (4) Communication (5) User programs

There is no priority order to the methods (1) to (5). The backlight OFF function retains the status effected when the LCD was operated last. Note that if the FAIL or ALM lamps are lit, or if an event is displayed, the backlight will light up even if the backlight has been set to OFF. (1) Front panel key If any key is pressed once while the LCD backlight is OFF, it will be turned ON.

However, it cannot be turned OFF by keystrokes. To set the backlight condition to OFF using keystrokes, employ method (2).

(2) OFF timer setting With the LCD backlight OFF timer turned ON, the LCD backlight will be turned OFF

when there has been no keystroke operation for 30 minutes.

(3) Digital input If digital input to which the backlight OFF function has been assigned changes from

open to close status, the backlight is turned OFF. If it changes from close to open status, the backlight is turned ON.

In YS1700’s programmable mode, the backlight cannot be turned OFF by digital input. For assigning the backlight OFF function to digital input: see 3.1.4 Changing Digital Input

Functions, in this manual.

(4) Communication The LCD backlight ON/OFF condition can be checked and set using a CFL flag

(communication register). Write “0” or “1” to the CFL flag through communication to (0) to turn the backlight ON or to (1) to turn it OFF. For backlight OFF function through communication: see YS1000 Series Communication

Interface User’s Manual.

(5) User programs The LCD backlight ON/OFF condition can be checked and set using a CFL flag. Write

“0” or “1” to the CFL flag using user programs, entering (0) to turn the backlight ON or (1) to turn it OFF. For backlight OFF function using user programs: see YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700

Programmable Function User’s Manual.

Setting Details


ECO LCD backlight auto-off timer

OFF: OFF timer function activated

ON : OFF timer function deactivated (Off timer: 30 min)

Tuning Display > Engineering Display > [LCD] (LCD Setting Display)


4-10 IM 01B08B02-02EN

4.1.9 Changing the Background and Loop Colors

Description

The background color of the Operation Display, and the color of the PV and MV bars of the LOOP Displays and the DUAL Display can be changed. Setting the Operation Display’s background color to black causes the color of the lettering to be white; setting the background color to white causes the color of the lettering to be black.

LOOP 1 Display

0417E.ai

Background color

Loop color

Setting Details


BKCL Background color selection BLACK WHITE BLUE Tuning Display >

Engineering Display > [DISPLAY] (Setting Display for Operation Display)

LP1C Loop 1 color selection GREEN AQUAPINKORANGE LP2C Loop 2 color selection

The LP2C parameter is used for loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable modes.


4-11IM 01B08B02-02EN


4

4.1.10 Adjusting LCD Brightness

Description

The brightness of the LCD can be adjusted. The adjustment bar display shows brightness adjustment values in bar format to indicate the current value with respect to the settable range.

0418E.ai

Selected parameter (zoom in)

Selected parameter

Adjustment bar display

Color bar displays

Setting Details


BRT LCD brightness adjustment 0 to 5

Tuning Display > Engineering Display > [LCD] (LCD Setting Display)


4-12 IM 01B08B02-02EN

4.2 Security Function

4.2.1 Setting/Releasing Keylock

Description

Keys can be locked to prevent inadvertent operation on the Operation Display.

0419E.ai

C/A/M key

SV key

MV key

Setting Details


CAMLK Keylock for C/A/M mode changeUNLOCK: Keys unlocked LOCK: Keys locked


SVLK Keylock for SV change

MVLK Keylock for MV change

4-13IM 01B08B02-02EN


4

4.2.2 Inhibiting/Enabling Parameter Change

Description

Setpoints for the tuning parameters or engineering parameters can be locked to prevent them from being inadvertently changed. When they are locked, the parameter setting increase key [ ] and decrease key [ ]displays are erased from each setting display. The password for locking them is a 4-digit numeral, which is not set at factory shipment. When the password is not set or is cleared, [SET PASSWORD] and [UNLOCK] are displayed. When the password is set, [ENT PASSWORD] and [LOCK] are displayed.

Software key function The software key function enables the front panel’s operation keys to function as keys displayed on the LCD display. • [SET] software key: Password setting key Press this key to set a password. • [ENT] software key: Password entry/cancellation key Press this key to cancel the password setting. • [→] key: Cursor movement key Moves the cursor position to the right when setting or entering a password. • [ ] software key: Number increase key Increases numbers. Numbers change from 0 to 9 cyclically. • [ ] software key: Number decrease key Decreases numbers. Numbers change from 0 to 9 cyclically.

Operating the Password Setting Display 1. Setting a password (setting a password to prevent parameter changes)

(1) Open the Password Setting Display. [SET PASSWORD] and [UNLOCK] are displayed.

(2) Press the [SET] software key. This causes the password [0000] to appear. (3) Using the [→] software key (digit movement) and the [ ] (increase) or [ ]

(decrease) software keys, set the password. (4) Press the [SET] software key. This changes the password background color. (5) Press the [SET] software key again. This erases the password, causing [ENT

PASSWORD] and [LOCK] to appear. At the instant the password is set, the [SET] software key display is erased, replaced by the [ENT] software key instead.

2. Entering/canceling a password (entering a password to the instrument to which the password has been set, to enable parameter changes) (1) Open the Password Setting Display. [ENT PASSWORD] and [LOCK] are displayed. (2) Press the [ENT] software key. This causes the password [0000] to appear. (3) Using the [→] software key (digit movement) and the [ ] (increase) or [ ]

(decrease) software keys, enter the password that has been set. (4) Press the [ENT] software key. This changes the password background color. (5) Press the [ENT] software key again. This erases the password if the password

entered agrees with the one that was set, causing [SET PASSWORD] and [UNLOCK] to appear. This brings about a status allowing parameters to be changed. If the password entered does not agree with the one that has been set, return to step (3).


4-14 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Setting/Entry Display

Operation Display > SHIFT + keys (to the Tuning Menu Display) > SHIFT + keys (to the Engineering Menu Display) > [PASSWORD] software key (Password Setting Display)

Password setting

Password setting

Password enter

Password status display

Password enter/cancellation

0420E.ai

Cursor movement software key Password setting software key Password enter software key

Increase software key Decease software key

Software key function display

Password enter


5-1IM 01B08B02-02EN

Adjusting D

irect Inputs (Temperature/R

esistance/Frequency)

5

5.1 List of Direct Input Specifications and Basic Operations

In the SC Setting Display, communication with the direct input cards, optional specifications, is made to set or adjust the input specifications. Examples of sensor type setting, burnout setting, input zero adjustment, and span adjustment procedures are described in sections 5.2 to 5.4. Other items are also set in the same way. The table below shows a list of setting items.

No. Name Display Description

Model-basis Data Display /A01 /A02 /A03 /A04 /A08

01 MODEL Model EM1*C ET5*C ER5*C ES1*C EP3*A02 TAG NO. Tag number 16 alphanumeric characters 03 SELF CHK Self-check results GOOD or ERROR A00 DISPLAY Display item -- -- -- -- --

A01 INPUT Input value [ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ]mV [ ][ ][ ][ ].[ ]degC [ ][ ][ ].[ ]degC [ ][ ][ ][ ][ ].[ ]OHM [ ][ ][ ][ ]Hz

A02 OUTPUT Output value [ ][ ][ ].[ ]%A03 STATUS Status FFA04 REV NO. Revision number n.000 (n: Revision number) B00 SET Setting item -- -- -- -- --B01 TAG NO1 Tag number 1 8 alphanumeric characters (8 first-half characters of a tag number) B02 TAG NO2 Tag number 2 8 alphanumeric characters (8 latter half characters of a tag number) B03 COMMENT1 Comment 1 8 alphanumeric characters (8 first-half characters of comment) B04 COMMENT2 Comment 2 8 alphanumeric characters (8 latter half characters of comment)

B05 INP TYPE ER5 input type -- --PT/JPT/

PT100-90/PT50(Note 1)

-- --

B06 INP TYPE ET5 input type -- B/E/J/K/T/R/S/N -- -- --

B07 LOW CUT Low cutoff -- -- -- --[ ][ ][ ][ ]Hz (Note 5)

B08 RESIST ES1 total resistance -- -- -- [ ][ ][ ][ ][ ].[ ]OHM --

B09 UNIT Temperature unit (Note 8) -- degC/degF/K degC/degF/K -- --

B10 ZERO Zero point [ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ]mV [ ][ ][ ][ ].[ ]degC [ ][ ][ ].[ ]degC [ ][ ][ ][ ][ ].[ ]OHM

[ ][ ][ ][ ]Hz (Note 5)

B11 SPAN Span (Note 2) [ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ]mV [ ][ ][ ][ ].[ ]degC [ ][ ][ ].[ ]degC [ ][ ][ ][ ][ ].[ ]OHM (Note 4)

[ ][ ][ ][ ]Hz (Note 5)

B12 BURN OUT Burnout OFF/UP/DOWN

OFF/UP/DOWN

OFF/UP/DOWN

OFF/UP/DOWN --

C00 ADJUST Adjustment item -- -- -- -- --

C01 OUT 0% 0% output correction (Note 7) ±10.00

C02 OUT 100% 100% output correction (Note 7) ±10.00

C03 WIRING R Burnout correction (Note 3)

EXECUTE/RESET

EXECUTE/RESET -- -- --

C04 ZERO ADJ Input zero adjustment (Note 6)

[ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ][ ]mVRST/INC/DEC

[ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ][ ]mVRST/INC/DEC

[ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ][ ]OHM

RST/INC/DEC-- --

C05 SPAN ADJ Input span adjustment (Note 6)

[ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ][ ]mVRST/INC/DEC

[ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ][ ]mVRST/INC/DEC

[ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ][ ]OHM

RST/INC/DEC-- --

C06 ZERO ADJ Input zero adjustment (Note 6) -- -- -- [ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ][ ]

OHM --

C07 SPAN ADJ Input span adjustment (Note 6) -- -- -- [ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ][ ]

OHM --

Chapter 5 Adjusting Direct Inputs (Temperature/Resistance/Frequency)

5-2 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Note 1: PT=Pt100(IPTS-68:JIS'89), JPT=JPt100(JIS'89), PT100-90=Pt100(ITS-90:JIS'97), PT50=Pt50(JIS'81)

Note 2: Measurable data is within the range stated in the standard specifications. Note 3: Burnout correction is the function of correcting an error caused by the burnout current

produced if an external conductor resistance is large. Note 4: Up to 30 kΩ is possible, but the standard specifications indicate 100 to 2000 Ω in. Note 5: Set in four significant digits or less. However, 10000 Hz can be set for span. Note 6: Input zero adjustment and input span adjustment are to make input adjustments of each

direct input card. /A01, /A02, and /A03 enable the adjustment of the offset and gain of the A/D converter. Select [INC] or [DEC] using the [ ] or [ ] software keys and press the [ENT] software key twice to make an adjustment for each selection. Also, to reset adjustments select [RST] and press the [ENT] software key twice. Zero and span are re-set in /A04. In other words, making a zero adjustment with an input set to 0% and a span adjustment with the input set to 100% (pressing the [ENT] software key twice) causes the zero (B10) and span (B11) values to be re-set automatically.

Note 7: Output correction is for adjusting the D/A converter (1 to 5 V output) of each direct input card. 0% output correction and 100% output correction enable offset and gain to be adjusted respectively. Set a value in the range of ±10.00% and press the [ENT] software key twice. This causes the D/A converter to enter a status in which the set value-added 0% output value or the 100% output value is continuously output. To exit this status, display another parameter once on the SC Setting Display, or turn the power supply OFF and then ON.

Note 8: If optional code /DF is specified, Fahrenheit tempertature range can be used for direct input range in addition to centigrade temperature range.

Basic Operations 1) Erroneous setting prevention function To prevent inadvertent operation, no parameter is selected (highlight displayed)

immediately after switching to the SC Setting Display. Press the [→] software key to select parameter [SET] (parameter setting enable/disable) from the top line of the display.

2) Setting-enable parameter operation [SET] on the top line is the parameter for enabling SC maintenance communication.

This parameter is in [INHB] (setting inhibited) immediately after switching to the SC Setting Display. SC maintenance communication cannot be accomplished unless this parameter is set to [ENBL] (setting enabled). To do so, select the [SET] parameter and then press the [ ] software key to change the setting from [INHB] to [ENBL]. At the same time, [STOP] appears at the upper right of the display. When the parameter is set to [ENBL], the operation mode is forced to switch to manual control (M mode), retaining the manipulated output and alarm output. Moreover, switching to another display causes this parameter to return to [INHB] automatically.

3) Software keys • [MNU] software key: Menu change key Each time this key is pressed, YS1000 communicates with the SC to read out

and display the SC menus. • [PRM] software key: Setting item change key Each time this key is pressed, YS1000 communicates with the SC to read out

and display the SC setting items. • [→] software key: Cursor movement key When the data type is alphanumeric characters, this key moves an highlight

displayed digit to the right. In this case, should the highlight display be at the rightmost digit, it then moves to the leftmost digit.

• [ ] software key: Data increase key Increases data. Data changes cyclically. • [ ] software key: Data decrease key Decreases data. Data changes cyclically. • [ENT] software key: Enter key Writes data to the SC. Writing is done in the following two steps:

(1) Press the [ENT] software key once. This causes the background color of all communication data to be highlight displayed.


5-3IM 01B08B02-02EN

Adjusting D



5

(2) Press the [ENT] software key again. This writes the data to the SC card, causing the display to return to normal display. If any key other than the [ENT] software key is pressed, the communication data returns to normal display without being written to the SC.

4) SC setting operation • SC setting is made as follows:

(1) Selecting the SC menu Press the [MNU] software key to read out and display the SC menus. Each

time the [MNU] software key is pressed, the model, tag number, and self-check results are displayed in turn. Further pressing the [MNU] key causes the display item, setting item, and adjustment items to be changed and displayed cyclically.

Model

Tag number

Self-check results

Display item

Setting item

Adjustm

ent item

[MNU][MNU][MNU] [MNU] [MNU] [MNU]

0501E.ai

(2) To select the display item, setting item, or adjustment item, further select a setting item.

Press the [PRM] software key to read out and display the SC setting item. Each time the [PRM] software key is pressed, the setting items are displayed

in turn. The parameters to be displayed change depending on the SC card; see the items in the list of displayed items. Press the [PRM] software key until the setting item you wish to set appears.

(3) Using the [→] software key (cursor movement) and the [ ] (data increase) or [ ] (data decrease) software keys, set the setting item.

(4) Press the [ENT] software key. This causes the setting item to be highlight displayed.

(5) Press the [ENT] software key again. This writes data to the SC card, causing the display to return to the normal display.

Pressing any key other than the [ENT] software key causes the display to return to the normal display without writing data.

Communication Status Display

Comment Display Status

COMMUNICATING Communicating with an SC card (normal communication)

COMMUN. ERR Communications error

OPERATION ERR Incorrect data sending

COMMAND ERR Incorrect command reception


5-4 IM 01B08B02-02EN

5.2 Setting Sensor Type

Description

The sensor type can be set as for thermocouple and RTD cards.

Setting Details

Operation Display > SHIFT + keys (to the Tuning Menu Display) > SHIFT + keys (to the Engineering Menu Display) > [SC MAINT] software key (Input Specification Setting Display)

Engineering Display Setting Procedure (example of setting an RTD type)

(1) Press the [→] software key to display [SET INHB] in highlight.

(2) Press the [ ] software key to display [SET ENBL]. (3) Press the [MNU] software key to display 01 MODEL Directly input the card model (e.g., ER5*C) (4) Press the [MNU] key several times to display B00 SET (5) Press the [PRM] software key several times to

display the left display. (6) Press the [ ] or [ ] software keys to change the

data display section. (7) Press the [ENT] software key to display the data

display section in highlight. (8) Press the [ENT] software key again to accept the

setting.

Setting completed.

0502E.ai

Parameternumber

Parameter name

Data display

Communicationstatus display

Software key function display

Menu change key Parameter change key Cursor movement key Data increase key Data decease key ENTER key

5-5IM 01B08B02-02EN

Adjusting D



5

5.3 Setting Burnout

Description

A burnout can be set as for mV input, thermocouple, RTD, and potentiometer input cards.

Setting Details


Engineering Display Setting Procedure


(2) Press the [ ] software key to display [SET ENBL]. (3) Press the [MNU] software key to display 01 MODEL Directly input the card model (e.g., ER5*C) (4) Press the [MNU] software key several times to

display B00 SET (5) Press the [PRM] software key several times to

display the left display. (6) Press the [ ] or [ ] software key to change the



setting.

Setting completed.

0503E.ai

Software key function displayParameter

numberParameter

nameData display



5-6 IM 01B08B02-02EN

5.4 Making Zero and Span Adjustments of Input

Description

Zero and span adjustments of inputs can be set as for mV input, thermocouple, and RTD cards.

Setting Details


Engineering Display Setting Procedure


(2) Press the [ ] software key to display [SET ENBL]. (3) Press the [MNU] software key to display 01 MODEL Directly input the card model (e.g., ER5*C) (4) Press the [MNU] key several times to display C00 ADJUST (5) Press the [PRM] software key several times to

display the left display. (6) Press the [ ] or [ ] software keys to change the



setting. Setting completed.

0504E.ai

Software key function displayParameter

numberParameter

nameData display



6-1IM 01B08B02-02EN

Processing during Power Failures

6

6.1 Processing during Power Failures

Description

YS1000 enters a power failure status if a momentary power interruption of about 20 ms occurs in the case of 100 V AC supply voltage, or if that of 1 ms or more occurs in the case of 24 V DC. The operation to be taken after power is restored can be set.

Data storage YS1000 data can be stored by making a setting with keystrokes or by making a setting using communication through YSS1000 Setting Software. Data to be stored are the operation mode, manipulated output variables, setpoints, setting parameters, T-register contents (for YS1700 only), user programs, event display data, and the previous values of dynamic operation of the user programs. Trend data displayed on a TREND Display will be lost in the event of a power failure.

Operation after power restoration The operation to be taken after power restoration depends on the duration of the power failure and the operation mode that the YS1000 is in after power restoration (the start mode (START) engineering parameter).

Start Mode (START) Power Failure Duration

Less than about 2 seconds About 2 seconds or more

AUT HOT start

M-COLD HOT start M-COLD start

A-COLD HOT start A-COLD start

C-COLD HOT start C-COLD start

COLD HOT start COLD start

Chapter 6 Processing during Power Failures

6-2 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Operation in Each Start ModeStart Mode (START)

HOT Start M-COLD Start A-COLD Start C-COLD Start COLD Start

C, A, M status Same as before power failure

M mode (LOOP 1)

A mode (LOOP 1)

C mode (LOOP 1)

Same as before power failure

LOOP 2’s operation

DUAL type Same as before power failure M mode A mode A mode Same as before

power failure

Cascade Same as before power failure

M mode (CLOSE) C mode C mode Same as before

power failure

Selector Same as before power failure M mode (LOCAL) A mode A mode Same as before

power failure

Manipulated output variable (MV) Same as before power failure −6.3%

Setpoint (SV) Same as before power failure

Parameters such as PID Same as before power failure

T registers (YS1700) Continued as is 0Dynamic operation such as first-order lag dead time Continued as is Initialization

Process alarms, STC alarms, and system alarms (including latches) Continued as is OFF

Analog output terminal Y1 Continued as is -20%

Analog output terminal Y2 Continued as is -6.3%

Analog output terminal Y3 Continued as is −6.3% (−20% at current output)

Analog output terminal Y4 Continued as is 0%

Analog output terminals Y5 to Y8 Continued as is 0%Peer-to-peer communication registers CX, CY, CI, and CO Continued as is 0

DO1 to DO10 Continued as is OFF

Communication loss CMWDT Continued as is Disabled (0 second)

Integral output pulse Continued as is OFF

PF key lamp Continued as is OFF


6-3IM 01B08B02-02EN

Processing during Power Failures

6

Power Failure Duration and Operation in Each Start Mode

Continuous

Continuous

Continuous

Continuous

Continuous

HOT start

HOT start

HOT start

HOT start

HOT start

HOT start

M-COLD start

A-COLD start

C-COLD start

COLD start

AUT mode

M-COLD mode

A-COLD mode

C-COLD mode

COLD mode

Start mode

t1

20ms (100V AC)1ms (24V DC)

t2

About 2 s

Time

Power failure insensitive Momentary power failure Power failure

0601E.ai

[Failure insensitive region (power failure duration < t1)] : t1 = about 1 ms (for 24 V DC type) : t1 = about 20 ms (for 100 V AC type) YS1000 performs the same operation as that of continuity status. [Momentary failure region (t1< power failure duration < t2)] : t2 = about 2 s The instrument stops operation during power failure. [Power failure region (RAM contents volatilized) (t2 < power failure duration)]: The instrument stops operation during power failure.

Setting Details


START Start mode

AUT: HOT startM-COLD:

Power failure duration<2sec.; HOT start Power failure duration≥2sec.; M-COLDstart

A-COLD: Power failure duration<2sec.; HOT start Power failure duration≥2sec.; A-COLDstart

C-COLD: Power failure duration<2sec.; HOT start Power failure duration≥2sec.; C-COLDstart

COLD: Power failure duration<2sec.; HOT start Power failure duration≥2sec.; COLDstart

Tuning Display>Engineering Display>[CONFIG1] (Configuration Display1)


Blank Page

7-1IM 01B08B02-02EN

Self-tuning Function

7

7.1 Overview of Self-tuning Function

7.1.1 What is Self-tuning?In locations where a control system is operating, an improvement in more precise controllability is required to: (1) Improve product quality (2) Stringently reduce material and energy requirements(3) Respond to the adoption of multi-product variable-volume production systems (4) Respond to more than one type of raw material or fuel (5) Respond to frequent changes in operating conditions or loads

A number of PID controllers are used in process control systems. To implement and maintain the optimum control conditions of a control loop, PID parameters must be tuned. This has been based on the adjustment experience and knowledge of a skilled operator or instrumentation engineer and his operational know-how specifically related to each process. Hence, the operator is always expected to perform precise tuning depending on the process operating conditions. However, owing to the wide range of complex jobs handled by veteran operators, there are at times cases where the tuning of PID parameters is insufficient. This self-tuning control (STC) function is very useful because the parameter follows the process change automatically without requiring the setting of the PID controller parameters every time.

The objectives of the self-tuning function are summarized in the following two points: To maintain optimum control following changes in static and dynamic process

characteristics To reduce the burden of operators’ tuning workloads during process start-up

7.1.2 Features and Usage Effects The self-tuning (STC) function is a combination of process identification techniques based on control theory and long-term control know-how. It has the following features: The self-tuning (STC) function estimates process characteristics through a response

made by a single setpoint change or MV changes by an on-demand command and promptly calculates the optimum PID parameters. Thus, there is no need to wait for waveform observation results that extend over a long period.

The process is not interrupted because no periodical application of test signals is required.

Characteristic changes can be monitored because the estimated process characteristics (dead time, time constant, and gain) are displayed during self-tuning (STC).

The user is not required to have any special knowledge of control theory. The self-tuning function is easy to use as there are only a few selections necessary to

set parameters. High and low limit values can be set for PID parameters to facilitate safe operations. Self-tuning (STC) can be switched ON/OFF.

Chapter 7 Self-tuning Function

7-2 IM 01B08B02-02EN

7.2 Operation Principle

7.2.1 Self-tuning In general, as the self-tuning controller (STC) updates PID parameters subsequent to process characteristic changes, in order to improve controllability it is necessary to capture the characteristic changes quickly. In self-tuning (STC), to calculate PID parameters the controller continuously observes fluctuations in the process variable (PV) and manipulated output value (MV). It estimates a process characteristic model from the resultant waveform response to a setpoint (SV) change or manipulated output value (MV) changes using an on-demand command. The figure below illustrates the operating principle of the self-tuning (STC) function.

PVProcess

PID computation

PID controller

Process characteristic estimation

Response monitoring

Estimated model

PID

SVMV

0701E.ai

Self-tuning (STC) Function’s Operating Principle Diagram

7.2.2 Response Monitoring The self-tuning controller (STC) continuously observes the process variable (PV) and manipulated output variable (MV) to collect data in a way similar to that of a skilled operator determining the next manipulated output variable (MV) by monitoring the process variable (PV) and manipulated output variable (MV) behavior on the recorder chart. Collected data is filtered to remove noise such as measurement noise and drifts in measured data. If a setpoint (SV) change or process variable (PV) fluctuation exceeds a certain criterion, the controller performs process characteristic estimation.

7.2.3 Estimating Process Characteristics The STC controller starts an estimation computation of process characteristics by collating the collected process variable (PV) and manipulated output variable (MV) waveform responses. Because the controller estimates process characteristics once using waveforms, estimation can be performed in very short response time. A process characteristic is expressed with the equivalent dead time (LM), equivalent time constant (TM), and equivalent process gain (GM) using first-order lag and dead time systems. Furthermore, the certainty factor (presumed accuracy error (CR)) is calculated from these estimated results. The process variable (PV) signals fluctuate due to the effects of disturbances and noise signals, as well as manipulated output variable (MV) signals. Thus, if these influences are large, the certainty factor (presumed accuracy error (CR)) of the estimated results decreases. The STC controller does not set PID parameters if the certainty factory (presumed accuracy) is low in consideration of process safety. Once estimation computation is carried out, the controller observes the waveforms again every specified time and if it detects a change in response, it repeats the process characteristic estimation.

7-3IM 01B08B02-02EN


7

7.2.4 PID Parameter Tuning The self-tuning controller (STC) calculates the optimum PID parameters depending on the designation of the control target type (OS), control operation formula (ALG), and high limit setpoint for derivative time (DMX) in response to the process characteristic estimated results. Generally, in a PID controller optimum PID parameters are different when following the setpoint and when suppressing disturbances. The STC controller calculates PID parameters for disturbance suppression when the control operation formulas (ALG) are the PV proportional type of PID control (I-PD) and of an adjustable setpoint filter (SVF) type. It calculates PID parameters for following a setpoint when the formulas are the PV derivative type of PID control (PI-D). It is recommended that the STC controller employ the SVF type which is capable of optimization in both suppressing disturbances and following setpoints. In this case, the optimum value of the setpoint filter α (SFA) parameter for SVF is also calculated.

PB, TI, and TD are obtained from this by the setting of each parameter: PB= f1 (LM, TM, GM, IP, OS, ALG) TI = f2 (LM, TM, GM, IP, OS, ALG) TD= f3 (LM, TM, GM, IP, OS, ALG)

*1: where PB: Proportional band, TI: Integral time, TD: Derivative time, OS: Control target type, IP: Process type, ALG: Control operation formula, LM: Equivalent dead time, TM: Equivalent time constant, GM: Equivalent process gain

*2: Note that the following parameters are automatically calculated; they cannot be set. LM: Equivalent dead time, TM: Equivalent time constant, and GM: Equivalent process gain For parameters: See 7.3 Self-tuning Parameters and Operations, in this manual. For adjustable setpoint filter (SVF) and setpoint filter α (SFA): see 1.2.6 Performing Stable

Control for the Step Response of Setpoints (Adjustable Setpoint Filter), in this manual.

Usually, the self-tuning (STC) controller calculates PID parameters based on the estimated results, but when it determines that the response has started to oscillate, it carries out tuning by stopping oscillation once. In addition, to increase the controller gain if control deviation does not decrease for an extended period, the controller limits the gain to a smaller range to ensure system safety.

7.2 Operation Principle

7-4 IM 01B08B02-02EN

7.3 Self-tuning Parameters and Operations

7.3.1 Parameters and Operations

Description

The table below shows a list of display setting parameters relating to the self-tuning (STC) function.

Self-tuning (STC) Related Parameter Names and Details

Parameter Name Setting Range Unit Default Necessity of Setting (*1)

OFF DISP ON ATSTUP

STC STC mode selection OFF, DISP, ON, ATSTUP – OFF

OD On-demand tuning start OFF, ON – OFF – –

PB1, PB2 Proportional band 0.1 to 999.9 % 999.9 −

TI1, TI2 Integral time 1 to 9999 Sec 1000 −

TD1, TD2 Derivative time 0 to 9999(0: no action) Sec 0

IP1, IP2 Process type STATIC, DYNAM – STATIC − −

TR1, TR2 Process response time 4 to 9999 Sec 300 − −

NB1, NB2 Noise band 0.0 to 20.0% Equivalent engineering units

Engineering units 0.0 − −

OS1, OS2 Control target type ZERO, MIN, MED, MAX – MED −

MI1, MI2 MV-applied signal span 0.0 to 20.0 % 5.0 −

PMX1, PMX2 High limit setpoint for proportional band 2.0 to 999.9 % 999.9 − −

PMN1, PMN2 Low limit setpoint for proportional band 2.0 to 999.9 % 2.0 − −

IMX1, IMX2 High limit setpoint for integral time 1 to 9999 Sec 9999 − −

IMN1, IMN2 Low limit setpoint for integral time 1 to 9999 Sec 1 − −

DMX1, DMX2 High limit setpoint for derivative time 0 to 9999 Sec 2000 − −

PA1, PA2 Calculated proportional band 2.0 to 999.9 % 999.9 / / / /

IA1, IA2 Calculated integral time 1 to 9999 Sec 1000 / / / /

DA1, DA2 Calculated derivative time 0 to 9999 Sec 0 / / / /

CR1, CR2 Presumed accuracy error 0.00 to 99.99 % 0.00 / / / /

RT1, RT2 Signal distribution ratio 0.000 to 9.999 – 1.000 / / / /

LM1, LM2 Equivalent dead time 0 to 9999 Sec 0 / / / /

TM1, TM2 Equivalent time constant 0 to 9999 Sec 0 / / / /

GM1, GM2 Equivalent process gain 0.000 to 9.999 – 0.000 / / / /

*1 : Item required to be set, −: Item not required to be set, /: Display-dedicated item, : Item required to be set at on-demand tuning

The PB2, TI2, TD2, IP2, TR2, NB2, OS2, MI2, PMX2, PMN2, IMX2, IMN2, DMX2, PA2, IA2, DA2, CR2, RT2, LM2, TM2, and GM2 parameters are used for loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable modes.

7-5IM 01B08B02-02EN


7

(1) STC mode selection (STC) The self-tuning (STC) function can be selected in the four modes shown in the table below.

List of STC Mode Selections

Setpoint Description

OFF The self-tuning (STC) function is stopped.

DISP Estimates the process and calculates PID parameters, but does not update PID parameters.

ON Estimates the process, calculates PID parameters and automatically updates PID parameters.

ATSTUP (Auto-startup)

Used at startup or if an initial setpoint is unknown. Computes self-tuning (STC) related parameters from a step response and sets them automatically.

Setting OFF, DISP, ON, or ATSTUP to the STC mode selection enables self-tuning (STC). For operations in each mode: see 7.4 Self-tuning (STC) Operations in Each Mode, in this

manual.

(2) On-demand tuning (OD) The table below describes an on-demand tuning (OD) function. This function applies a step signal to the manipulated output variable and then automatically returns to STC = DISP or STC = ON. It is used for systems where setpoints should not be changed excessively .

On-demand Tuning (OD)

Setpoint Description

ON

Performs self-tuning (STC) with a stepwise test signal applied to the manipulated output variable (MV). (This function is available only when the STC mode selection is DISP or ON.) OD is used for cases where the setpoint (SV) should not be changed.

OFF Deactivates the on-demand tuning (OD) function.

For on-demand tuning (OD) operations: see 7.4 Self-tuning (STC) Operations in Each Mode, in this manual.

(3) PID parameters (PB1, PB2, TI1, TI2, TD1, and TD2) These PID parameters are used in control computation. Initial PID parameters are set in the following manner:

1) For a new process If PID parameters can be determined by analogy or calculated from other process

results, use them. If it is difficult to determine them using these means, use auto-startup (ATSTUP).

2) If auto-startup (ATSTUP) cannot be used Start self-tuning with the STC mode selection set to DISP and use the PID values

displayed as updated PID values (PA1, PA2, IA1, IA2, DA1, and DA2). 3) For replacement of the control system in the existing process Use PID parameters that were in use prior to replacement.

For calculated PID values (PA1, PA2, IA1, IA2, DA1, and DA2): see 7.3.1 (10), Calculated PID values (PA1, PA2, IA1, IA2, DA1, and DA2), in this manual.


7-6 IM 01B08B02-02EN

(4) Process type (IP1, IP2) Specify whether the process is static (STATIC) or astatic (integral system) (DYNAM). For static processes, if a step change is applied to the manipulated output variable (MV) as shown in figure (1) below, the process variable (PV) reaches equilibrium with a settled value over time. As shown in figure (2) below, an astatic system is a process where the PV rises or drops infinitely when a step change is applied to a manipulated variable (MV). This is equivalent to level control by a metering pump where the rate of outflow is consistent.

(1) Static process

MV

MV

PV

PV

PV settled value

Time

Time

(2) Astatic (integral system) process

0702E.ai

Step Response in Static and Astatic (Integral System) Processes

(5) Process response time (TR1, TR2) Specify the time equivalent to a 95% rise time of the process step response (in an open loop). From this time the self-tuning controller (STC) calculates the observation time for the measured signal waveforms, and the sampling time for estimating the process characteristics. The process response time is appropriately set in the following ways. Estimation from the process step-response waveform: Calculate the time taken by the process variable change (∆PV) to reach 95% of the

final PV-settled value. If the step response is approximated by dead time (L) and first-order lag time constant (T), then TR = L + 3T.

For an astatic (integral system) process: Calculate the time taken by the process variable change (∆PV) to reach 95% of

the final PV-settled value when a pulse input is applied to the manipulated output variable (MV).

Estimation from the state operated up to that point: Read the period (TP) of an almost satisfactory damped oscillation waveform and

set TR = TP.

If response time variation is expected Match the process response time to that of the response waveform to be controlled.

If the process variable (PV) response time is different between the rise and fall as in furnace temperatures, set the response time to the most dramatic rise and fall .


7-7IM 01B08B02-02EN


7

Notes: 1/20th of the process response time becomes the sampling period (TS) for estimation of the process, but a response waveform having a period shorter than 2TS cannot be properly captured. In general, the process characteristic estimated value error becomes smaller if the process response time is set to be greater rather than smaller than the actual value. Moreover, if the process response time is changed, the self-tuning controller (STC) does not operate during 4TR because measured data in the controller is initialized.

MV

(1) Estimation from a step response

PV

Time

PV Settled value

TR

95%

(2) Estimation from damped oscillation waveform

PV

Time

TP

TR=TP

Natural oscillation period

0703E.ai

Estimation Method of Process Response Time

(6) Noise band (NB1, NB2) Noise band (NB) is used to prevent process-characteristic estimations from being disturbed by noise. In setting NB, set it at approximately the equal height of the peak value of a random noise signal superimposing on the process variable (PV) signal. In the figure below, with the setpoint at other than 0 (default value), the STC controller estimates the process characteristics if the process variable (PV) response waveform oscillates by more than (preset value + 1/2 NB).

Preset value

NB

0704E.ai

Noise Band


7-8 IM 01B08B02-02EN

(7) Control target type (OS1, OS2) Set the control target desired by the user. The desired response waveform differs depending on the process type or operation method. For example, overshoot is not preferred in the temperature control of reaction or heat treatment processes. In contrast, it is often said in pressure control or flow rate control that quick response comes first and overshoot is allowed to a certain extent. The table below shows the types and features of the control target types:

Control Target Types and Features

Setpoint Features Performance Criteria

ZERO Overshoot: None Overshoot: Zero

MIN Overshoot: Small (about 5%) Settling time: Short

Weighted control area: Minimum Min ∫∞0 |e| • t dt

MED Overshoot: Medium (about 10%) Rise time: A little fast

Control area: Minimum Min ∫∞0 |e| dt

MAX Overshoot: Large (about 15%) Rise time: Fast

Square control area: Minimum Min ∫∞0 e2 dt

When control target type = ZERO, there is no overshoot. When control target type = MIN, overshoot decreases because the performance criteria in which a deviation area is multiplied with the time elapsed is minimized. When control target type = MED, the control area shown below is minimized. (Recommended)

SV

Time0705E.ai

PV response

Control area

Control Area (Case Where a Setpoint (SV) is Changed)

When control target type = MAX, the square area value of a deviation (E) is minimized resulting in the achievement of a quick rise with a moderately large overshoot.

(8) MV-applied signal span (MI1, MI2) Specify a test signal step change applied to the manipulated output variable (MV) in the auto startup (ATSTUP) or on-demand tuning (OD). As a guide, set it so that the process variable (PV) deflects about 5%. • In auto startup (ATSTUP), the applied signal is given in the direction the sign of the

deviation (E) extends since it is performed in manual control (M). • In on-demand tuning (OD), the applied signal is given in the direction deviation (E)

decreased, since it is performed in automatic control (A) or cascade setting automatic control (C).

Direction of an MV Step Change

DIR (Direct action) RVS (Reverse action)

SV>PV +MI% (−MI%) −MI% (+MI%)

SV<PV −MI% (+MI%) +MI% (−MI%)

SV=PV +MI% (+MI%) −MI% (−MI%)

Item out of parentheses: For auto startup (ATSTUP), Item in parentheses: For on-demand turning (OD)


7-9IM 01B08B02-02EN


7

(9) PID limit values These parameters are used to limit the range of PID parameter changes during self-tuning(STC). If PID parameter changes appear to adversely affect the process by exceeding certain limits, set the limit values in advance. If a high limit value is set that is less than or equal to the low limit value, the parameter is fixed at the low limit value. If a PID parameter reaches a limit value during self-tuning (STC), a self-tuning alarm (STCALM) occurs. (Calculated PID values (PA1, PA2, IA1, IA2, DA1, and DA2) are not limited.) When the STC mode selection (STC) is DISP or ON, PI control is designated if the high limit setpoint for derivative time (DMX) is set to “0”. PID control.or PI control is also designated if DMX is set to a value other than 0. For calculated PID values (PA1, PA2, IA1, IA2, DA1, and DA2): see 7.3.1 (10) Calculated PID

values (PA1, PA2, IA1, IA2, DA1, and DA2), in this manual. For self-tuning alarm (STCALM): see 7.4.8 Self-tuning Alarms, in this manual.

(10) Calculated PID values (PA1, PA2, IA1, IA2, DA1, and DA2) Parameters calculated from process characteristics estimated from self-tuning can be displayed but are not used for control computation. If a calculated PID parameter reaches a limit value, the self-tuning alarm (STCALM) occurs, but the displayed value is not limited. For self-tuning alarm (STCALM): see 7.4.8 Self-tuning Alarms, in this manual.

(11) Presumed accuracy errors (CR1, CR2) These errors represent an error of accuracy presumed when the process characteristics are estimated. If the estimated results match the actual process, the presumed accuracy error becomes small. If the estimated results are unsatisfactory due to the effects of noise or disturbances, the presumed accuracy error becomes large. If the presumed accuracy error is greater than 5%, in consideration of safety the self-tuning controller (STC) determines that estimation cannot be made and tries to conduct estimation again without making PID calculations.

(12) Signal variance ratio (RT1, RT2) The ratio of the process variable’s (PV) variance to the set model output’s variance is displayed. The self-tuning controller (STC) calculates this ratio using an estimated model to detect variations in process characteristics. If STC mode selection = ON has not yet been held, the STC controller does not calculate a signal variance ratio, but displays a default value of 1.000 and issues no alarm. If the process and model agree with each other, the signal variance ratio becomes almost “1.” If a signal distribution ratio is ≥ 0.5 or ≥ 2, the STC controller generates an alarm (large characteristic change).

(13) Estimated equivalent model (LM1, LM2, TM1, TM2, GM1, and GM2) The STC controller expresses an estimated process model by approximating it with dead time and first-order lag systems (or with a response to pulse input in the case of an astatic (integral) system). The equivalent dead time, equivalent time constant, and equivalent process gain are updated if STC mode selection (STC) is DISP or ON, and the presumed accuracy error is less than 5%. (The presumed accuracy error is updated each time the process characteristics are estimated.)


7-10 IM 01B08B02-02EN

7.4 Self-tuning (STC) Operations in Each Operation Mode

The self-tuning (STC) function automatically adjusts the PID parameters to achieve optimum control status in PID control. The figure below shows a self-tuning (STC) function operation flow.

(STC mode selection = DISP)

(STC mode selection = DISP or ON)

STC mode selected?

Acquire PV and MV

Start

Is the PV fluctuating?

Estimate process characteristics

Calculate PID parameters

Is the presumed accuracy

high?

STC mode selection

= ON?

Set PID parameter change

PID control

Startup processing

Only display calculated PID values

Return

Auto startup (STC mode selection = ATSTUP)

Self-tuning (STC) function stopped (STC mode = OFF)

Processing completed?

NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

0706E.ai

(STC mode selection = ON)

Self-tuning (STC) Operation Flow Chart

In the figure above, when the STC mode selection is DISP or ON, self-tuning proceeds through the central part of the flow and acquires process variables (PV) and manipulated output variables (MV). If process variable (PV) variation is within the specified values, controllability is assumed to be good. If PV variation exceeds a specified value, the STC controller estimates the process characteristics. If certainty (presumed accuracy (CR)) is high, it calculates PID parameters. The user can specify whether calculated PID parameters are used in control computation. If it has been specified that the parameters are not to be updated (STC mode selection = DISP), only new parameters are displayed. If it has been specified that they are to be updated (STC mode selection = ON), the PID parameters are updated to the new parameters. These operations are performed once in every control period of the controller.

7-11IM 01B08B02-02EN


7

7.4.1 STC Mode Selection = ATSTUPIn this mode, the controller automatically calculates self-tuning (STC) related parameters and the setpoint filter α (SFA) for the adjustable setpoint filter (SVF) from a step response and sets them. After setting the parameters, the self-tuning changes to STC mode selection (STC) = ON to conduct control. For adjustable setpoint filter (SVF) and setpoint filter α (SFA): see 1.2.6 Performing Stable

Control for the Step Response of Setpoints (Adjustable Setpoint Filter), in this manual.

(1) Applicability of ATSTUPThe following shows the applicability of ATSTUP in the controller modes (CTL) and control modules.

Controller Mode (CTL) Applicability

Multi-function mode


Cascade mode (CAS)

Selector mode (SELECT) N/A

Programmable mode

Basic control module (BSC1)


Cascade control module (CSC)

Selector control module (SSC) N/ALegend : Applicable, N/A: Not available

(2) Setting parameters To use auto startup (ASTSTUP), set the parameters described in 7.3 Self-tuning Parameters and Operations. Note that when the setting derivative time (TD) = 0, PI control is selected. If the setting derivative time (TD) is set to a value other than “0,” PID control is selected. (If PI control is judged to be desirable as a result of auto startup (ATSTUP), there are cases where PI control is selected.)

(3) Operating procedure and operations 1) First check that no self-tuning alarm (STCALM) is being given.

* If a self-tuning alarm (STCALM) is being issued, eliminate the cause of the alarm.

2) In manual control (M), set the STC mode selection to ATSTUP. This starts auto startup (ATSTUP), causing [ATSTUP] to be displayed on the LOOP

Display’s control status display section.3) Fully stabilize the process variable (PV) signal manually at an appropriate value. 4) Switch the operation mode to cascade setting automatic control (C) or automatic

control (A). * The controller retains the current manipulated output variable (MV) for 30

seconds. 5) The controller automatically gives the step change of the MV-applied signal span (MI)

to direct the manipulated output variable (MV) in a safe direction (a direction in which the deviation is not reversed, but extended).

* PID control is not yet started. 6) Observe the response of the process variable (PV) with respect to the step change.

* If a PV variation range (∆PV) exceeds MI × 1.5, the controller automatically returns the manipulated output value (MV) to the original value.


7-12 IM 01B08B02-02EN

7) When the process variable (PV) is stabilized, the controller automatically returns the manipulated output variable (MV) to the original value and observes the PV signal response.

* If the process gain is low and the PV variation range (∆PV) is less than 2%, auto startup (ATSTUP) is considered inappropriate. In such a case the operation mode returns to manual control (M) and the STC mode selection changes to DISP after the maximum observation time (about 80 minutes) has passed, causing a self-tuning alarm (STCALM) to be occurred.

8) Using the data obtained from the step response, the controller estimates the process characteristics and calculates the PID parameters (PB, TI, and TD) in the same manner as in the case of STC mode selection = ON.

The PID limit values are set to values four times the PID parameters (PB, TI, and TD) (high limit setpoint) and 1/4 of the time for the PID parameters (low limit setpoint).

The process response time (TR) is set to “LM + 3TM” seconds. The process type (IP) is set from the process variable (PV) at the beginning and from that at the end of the response.

Furthermore, if it has been determined that the process characteristic estimated results are inappropriate, the controller issues a self-tuning alarm (STCALM) and stops auto startup (ATSTUP).

9) Then the controller observes the noise peak value for a successive specified time (2T5, or 2 minutes minimum to 5 minutes maximum) and calculates the noise band (NB) from the observed peak value.

10) When all setting items have been calculated and correctly set, the STC mode selection automatically changes to ON, starting PID control and self-tuning (STC).

11) If any of the following situations occur during auto startup (ATSTUP), the controller stops operations to change to manual control (M) and changes the STC mode selection to DISP.

• Power failure • Occurrence of a self-tuning alarm (STCALM) • Change to manual control (M)

For self-tuning alarm (STCALM): see 7.4.8 Self-tuning Alarms, in this manual.

7.4.2 STC Mode Selection = DISP This mode is effective for the preliminary self-tuning (STC) test. In this mode, the controller estimates the process characteristics, calculates the PID parameters, and displays calculated values for the calculated PID values (PA1, PA2, IA1, IA2, DA1, and DA2). By observing these values, the user can check in advance whether self-tuning will be effective or not. Note that the PID parameters (PB1, PB2, TI1, TI2, TD1, and TD2) are not changed. With the STC mode selection in DISP, setting the controller to automatic control (A) or cascade setting automatic control (C) enables the self-tuning function to start. However, if a self-tuning alarm (STCALM) has occurred, the cause of the alarm must be eliminated first. *: To use the STC mode selection in DISP, set the parameters described in 7.3 Self-

tuning Parameters and Operations. For PID parameters (PB1, PB2, TI1, TI2, TD1, and TD2): see 7.3.1 (3) PID parameters (PB1,

PB2, TI1, TI2, TD1, and TD2), in this manual. For calculated PID values (PA1, PA2, IA1, IA2, DA1, and DA2): see 7.3.1 (10) Calculated PID

values (PA1, PA2, IA1, IA2, DA1, and DA2), in this manual. For self-tuning alarm (STCALM): see 7.4.8 Self-tuning Alarms, in this manual.


7-13IM 01B08B02-02EN


7

7.4.3 STC Mode Selection = ON In this mode, the controller estimates the process characteristics and calculates PID parameters. The PID parameters for control are automatically updated. With the STC mode selection ON, setting the controller to automatic control (A) or cascade setting automatic control (C) enables the self-tuning function to start. However, if a self-tuning alarm (STCALM) has occurred, the cause of the alarm must be eliminated first. For self-tuning alarms (STCALM): see 7.4.8 Self-tuning Alarms, in this manual.

7.4.4 STC Mode Selection = OFF In this mode, self-tuning (STC) operation is not performed. The controller operates as an ordinary PID controller.

7.4.5 On-demand Tuning (OD) In the on-demand tuning (OD) mode, the STC controller applies a stepwise test signal to the manipulated output variable (MV) in a closed loop state at the operator’s request and implements self-tuning (STC) from the response of the process variable (PV) at that time. (When STC mode selection = DISP or ON.) This mode is effective if the setpoint (SV) cannot be changed.

On-demand tuning (OD) = OFF Operation by the on-demand tuning (OD) function is not performed.

On-demand tuning (OD) = ON The figure below shows the response when the on-demand tuning (OD) function is activated.

On-demand command

MV

PV

Tuning

0707E.ai

(1) Applicable conditions The on-demand tuning (OD) function operates only when all of the following conditions are met.

1) Controller mode (CTL) The following table shows the applicability of the OD function in the controller mode

and control modules.

Controller Mode (CTL) Applicability

Multi-function mode


Cascade mode (CAS)

Selector mode (SELECT) N/A

Programmable mode




Selector control module (SSC) N/ALegend : Applicable, N/A: Not available For basic control modules, cascade control modules, and selector control modules: see

YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700 Programmable Function User’s Manual.


7-14 IM 01B08B02-02EN

2) Operation mode Set the operation mode to automatic control (A) or cascade setting automatic control

(C). In cascade setting automatic control (C), the on-demand tuning function does not operate in the DDC or SPC modes.

3) STC mode selection Set the STC mode selection to DISP or ON.

(2) Setting parameters To use the on-demand tuning (OD) function, set the parameters described in 7.3 Self-tuning Parameters and Operation.

(3) Operation procedure and operations (1) Check that the operation mode is in automatic control (A) or cascade setting automatic

control (C). (2) Check that the STC mode selection is DISP or ON. (3) Set the on-demand tuning (OD) to ON. (Setting the STCOD flag from “0” to “1” using user programs enables the activation of

the OD function.) (4) An MV-applied signal span (MI) is added to the manipulated output variable (MV). (5) Self-tuning (STC) is performed based on the process variable (PV) response.

7.4.6 Starting and Stopping the Self-tuning Function Control target The self-tuning (STC) function always operates on one control loop. The following describes control loops that can be operated by the STC function. Start/stop of the self-tuning function can be specified by changes made with keys or by using user programs.

Multi-function Mode

Controller Mode (CTL) Description

Multi-function mode


Setting the STC mode designation enables the self-tuning function to be operable.

Cascade mode (CAS)

The loop to be controlled is determined by the open/closed status. • Loop 2 is controlled in the open status. • Loop 1 is controlled in the closed status.

Selector mode (SELECT) The loop selected by auto selector (ATSEL) is controlled.

Programmable Mode Controller Mode (CTL) Description

Programmable mode


Setting the STC mode designation enables the self-tuning function to be operable.

Basic control module (BSC2) Specifies the loop to be controlled using user programs.


The loop to be controlled is determined by the open/closed status. • Loop 2 is controlled in the open status. • Loop 1 is controlled in the closed status.

Selector control module (SSC) The loop selected by auto selector (ATSEL) is controlled.

* When the multi-function mode’s cascade mode (CAS) or the programmable mode’s cascade control module (CSC) is used in the closed (CLOSE) status, activating auto startup (ATSTUP) or on-demand tuning (OD) causes an MV-applied signal span (MI) to be added to the Loop 1’s manipulated output variable (MV). In this case, the Loop 1’s manipulated output variable can be seen as setpoint 2 (SV2) on the display.

For basic control modules, cascade control modules, and selector control modules: see YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700 Programmable Function User’s Manual.


7-15IM 01B08B02-02EN


7

Starting and stopping the self-tuning (STC) function The self-tuning (STC) function continues operating when the STC mode selection is DISP or ON, but it can be stopped and started. It can also be operated using a digital input (DI) signal. This feature is useful when the self-tuning (STC) function needs to be stopped during shutdown, or when it is in transition status in a batch process, or in the event of a foreseen disturbance in other processes.

Self-tuning (STC) stop command by means of digital input while in the multi-function mode

A self-tuning (STC) stop command can be implemented using a digital input. For stopping self-tuning using digital input: see Chapter 3, Auxiliary Input and Output

Functions, in this manual.

Self-tuning (STC) stop command using the PF key in the multi-function mode To stop self-tuning (STC) using the PF key, set the PF key function specification to

(PFKEY) = STC. However, if a self-tuning (STC) stop using a digital input has been specified, the STC stop command using the PF key is disabled.


PFKEYSelection of PF key function

−: No function assigned STC: Self-tuning activated


Specifying self-tuning (STC) stop using user programs The self-tuning (STC) function can be set using user programs in addition to setting

it with keys. If the STC function is set using user programs, STC setting with keys is disabled.

The following shows flags provided by the control module extended function registers for user programs.

(1) STC operation mode specification flags (STCM1, STCM2) (2) STC target loop flag (STCLP) (3) On-demand specification flag (STCOD) (4) STC start/stop flag (STCSW)

For user programs and extended function registers: see YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700 Programmable Function User’s Manual.

1) STC operation mode specification flags (STCM1, STCM2) The following table shows the correspondence between the STC operation mode

specification flags and self-tuning (STC).

Correspondence between the STC Operation Mode Specification Flags and STC Modes

STCM1 STCM2 STC Mode Description

0 0 OFF Stops the self-tuning (STC) function.

1 0 DISP Displays PID parameters.

0 1 ON Updates PID parameters automatically.

1 1 ATSTUP Auto startup

STC mode selection (OFF, DISP, ON, ATSTUP) can be identified based on the values of the STC operation mode specification flags specified in the table above. Writing relevant values to the register enables the set up of STC mode selection.


7-16 IM 01B08B02-02EN

2) STC target loop flag (STCLP) The STC target loop flag specifies the loop to be controlled when a basic control

module (BSC1, BSC2) is used. Moreover, if the STC target loop flag (STCLP) is not specified in user programs, the Loop 1 becomes the target.

STC Target Loop Flag

STCLP Description

0 Loop 1 is the target.

1 Loop 2 is the target.

3) On-demand specification flag (STCOD) The following table shows the start/stop of the on-demand tuning (OD) function using

the on-demand specification flag.

On-demand Specification Flag

STCOD OD Description

0 OFF Stops on-demand tuning (OD).

1 ON Starts on-demand tuning (OD).

4) STC start/stop flag (STCSW) The following table shows the start/stop of the self-tuning (STC) function using the

STC start/stop flag.

STC Start/Stop Flag

STCSW Description

1 Stops the self-tuning (STC) function.

0 Does not stop the STC function.

* f the STC start/stop flag = 0, the self-tuning (STC) function set by STC mode selection or the STC operation mode specification flag operates.


7-17IM 01B08B02-02EN


7

The following shows a self-tuning (STC) function block diagram.

Parameter

Parameter

Parameter

STCSW

STCLP

STCM1

STCM2

STCOD

STC start/stop0: Start 1: Stop

STC mode designationOFFDISPONATSTUP

STC

OD

On-demand tuningOFFON

IPn

NBn

IMNnIMXnPMNnPMXnMInOSn

TRnPAn

DAn

GMnTMnLMnRTnCRn

IAn

*n=1, 2DMXn

0708E.ai

STC target loop0: Loop 11: Loop 2

The following shows a self-tuning (STC) function block diagram.


7-18 IM 01B08B02-02EN

7.4.7 Combining STC with Various Control Functions Self-tuning (STC) is applied to PID control, which composes feedback loops. Thus, if a feedback loop cannot be configured by switching the operation mode or by combining STC with sequence computation, the self-tuning function should be stopped. Combining self-tuning (STC) with controller modes (CTL) The following table shows the combination of self-tuning (STC) with control functions or controller modes (CTL).

Combination of Self-tuning (STC)with Control Functions

Control Functions DISP ON ATSTUP OD

Controller Mode (CTL) Multi-function mode


Cascade mode (CAS)

Selector mode (SELECT) – –

Control Type (CNT) Standard PID control (PID)

Proportional (PD) control – – – –

Control Method


Output limiter

PID control with reset bias

Feedforward control (*4) × × × ×

Legend : Combination available, ×: Not recommended , −: Not allowed

Combination of Self-tuning (STC)with Control Functions

Control Functions DISP ON ATSTUP OD

Controller Mode (CTL) Programmable mode

Basic function module (BSCn) (*1)


Selector control module (SSC) – –

Control Type (CNT)

Standard PID control (PID)

Sample-and-hold PI control (S-PI) – – – –Batch PID control (BATCH) – – – –Proportional (PD) control – – – –

Extended Control Registers


Output limiter

PID control with reset bias

Feedforward control (*2) × × × ×

Input compensation (dead time compensation) (*3) × × × ×

Variable gain × × × ×

C ↔ A mode switching –

C or A ↔ M mode switching *4 *4 *4 *4

Output tracking – – – –Preset MV – – – –

*1: n = 1 to 2 *2: The use of self-tuning (STC) with feedforward compensation is not recommended because

if the selection of a feedforward signal or compensation computation is inappropriate, observation of the process variable (PV) becomes difficult.

*3: In input compensation (dead time compensation) control, it is difficult to measure correct process dead time. If inappropriate dead time is set, functional overlapping with self-tuning (STC) results. Thus, a combination of input compensation with STC is not generally recommended.

However, the combination of input compensation with self-tuning (STC) delivers effects in applications such as reactors in which the temperature and gain relationship is incorporated in advance.


7-19IM 01B08B02-02EN


7

*4: For switching from C or A mode to M mode or vice versa, if the mode is switched to manual mode (M), STC mode selection = DISP or ON and on-demand tuning (OD) are disabled. Also, auto startup (ATSTUP) does not function in automatic control (A) or in cascade setting automatic control (C).

Legend : Combination available ×: Not recommended (No self-tuning alarm (STCALM) is caused, but do not use the

combination specified because self-tuning may not function properly.) −: Not allowed (A self-tuning alarm occurs.) For self-tuning alarm (STCALM): see 7.4.8 Self-tuning Alarms, in this manual. For extended function registers: see YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700 Programmable

Function User’s Manual

Combination of self-tuning (STC) and operation modes The following table shows combination of self-tuning (STC) with each operation mode.

Combination of Self-tuning (STC) and Operation Modes

Operation Mode DISP ON ATSTUP OD

Manual control (M) – – –Automatic control (A) –

Cascade Setting Automatic Control (C)

Analog cascade setting mode (CAS) –

Computer cascade mode (CMP) (SPC) –

(DDC) – – – –− (No setting) – – – –

Legend : Combination available −: Combination not allowed (A self-tuning alarm (STCALM) occurs.) For self-tuning alarm (STCALM): see 7.4.8 Self-tuning Alarms, in this manual.


7-20 IM 01B08B02-02EN

7.4.8 Self-tuning Alarms If the self-tuning function cannot be operated normally, the status is displayed on the Alarm Display. The table below shows the displays of self-tuning alarms (STCALM) and their descriptions.

Self-tuning Alarm (STCALM) Display Items

Name Display Description and Cause STC Operation How to Clear

System alarm SYSALM

• Attempt to execute a control operation formula that is prohibited for combination with STC

• Control function is not properly executed. • Current output is open. (*2)

• STC function stops. • ATSTUP is disabled

(*5) or cancelled. (*6)

Remove the cause of alarm (*7) or set STC mode selection = OFF

PV alarm PVOVR • PV is less than −6.3% or over 106.3%.

• STC function continues. (*5)

• ATSTUP is disabled or cancelled. (*6)

MV alarm MVLMT

• MV is over the output limit MH or ML (with the exception of manual control (M)). (*3)

• MI value is unacceptable before starting ATSTUP.

• MV has been changed or limited after starting ATSTUP.

Operation abnormality OPERR • Operation abnormal in STC = ATSTUP

(*4)

Identification not possible IDERR

• PV changes are too slight to identify the process model in STC = ATSTUP. (Exceeding the limit time, 80 minutes max.)

PB alarm PBLMT • PB ≥ PMX or PB ≤ PMN • STC function

continues. • No alarm is issued

during execution of ATSTUP.

Remove the cause of alarm (*7), set STC mode selection = OFF, or execute ATSTUP (RT is set to 1.000).

TI alarm TILMT • TI ≥ IMX or TI ≤ IMN

TD alarm TDLMT • TD ≥ DMX (With the exception of TD = DMX = 0)

RT alarm RTALM • RT > 2 or RT < 0.5

*1 The meaning of the symbols in the table is as follows: PV: Process variable, MV: Manipulated output variable, MH: High limit setpoint for MV, ML:

Low limit setpoint for MV, ATSTUP: Auto startup STC:Self-tuning, MI: MV-applied signal span, PB: Proportional band, PMX: High limit setpoint

for proportional band, PMN: Low limit setpoint for proportional band, TI: Integral time IMX: High limit setpoint for integral time, IMN: Low limit setpoint for integral time, TD:

Derivative time, DMX: High limit setpoint for derivative time, DMN: Low limit setpoint for derivative time

RT: Signal distribution ratio *2: If the basic control module (BSC2) is set as the loop to be controlled by self-tuning (STC) in

the programmable mode (PROG), current output is detected when analog output 3 (Y3) is opened. In cases other than this, it is detected when analog output 1 (Y1) is opened.

*3: There are the following cases: (1) If the MV-applied signal span (MI) is applied to the manipulated output variable (MV), the

MV is limited to the high limit setpoint for MV (MHn) and to the low limit setpoint for MV (MLn). Moreover, there may be cases where the MV exceeds the output range.

(2) If the MV-applied signal span (MI) = 0 is set


7-21IM 01B08B02-02EN


7

*4: There are the following cases: (1) The STC start/stop flag (STCSW) is 1 (stopped). (2) Transition to BUN status (3) Transition to the EXT-MAN status (when the multi-function mode is in single mode

(SINGLE)) (4) Transition to the DDC mode, preset MV, or tracking status when the cascade mode is

closed with the multi-function mode in cascade mode (CAS) or the programmable mode (PROG) in cascade control module (CSC)

(5) Change of the STC target loop (STCLP) at the basic control module (BSCn) in programmable mode

(6) STC mode selection change (7) Occurrence of power failure

*5: If an alarm occurs before auto startup (ATSTUP) begins, auto startup does not start even when the instrument front panel’s “A” key is pressed.

*6: If an alarm occurs after auto startup (ATSTUP) begins, the following statuses are brought about: • Operation mode = manual control (M) • STC mode specification (STC) = DISP

*7: If a self-tuning alarm (STCALM) occurs after auto startup (ATSTUP) has started, the self-tuning alarm will not be cleared even when the cause of it is eliminated.

In this case, clear the alarm in the following manner: (1) Display the Alarm Display and press the CLR key. (2) Re-execute auto startup (with the cause of the alarm eliminated). (3) Set STC mode selection (STC) = OFF.


7-22 IM 01B08B02-02EN

7.5 Simulation Test

7.5.1 Scope of Application To determine the scope of application of the self-tuning (STC) controller, process simulations and field tests were performed in a wide range of processes and of initial PID parameters. Most industrial processes can be approximated using a combination of high-order lag elements, dead time, and gain as shown in the following equation.

=Ke-LS

Gp(s)(1+T1S)(1+T2S) ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ (1+TnS)

0709E.ai

The self-tuning (STC) controller exhibits good tuning characteristics for variations in the process variable due to setpoint and manipulated variable changes. The controller performs tuning if the process does not adapt to changes in the operating conditions or load variations which change the process characteristics (gain, dead time, and lag time constants). It can perform good control for up to a dead time to lag time constant ratio L/T of approximately 3.

The following conditions are required for the application of the self-tuning controller: (1) PID control must be possible. (2) The intervals of the factors that cause changes in control deviation (such as process

characteristic changes and setpoint changes) must be greater than the natural oscillation period of the control loop.

(3) The response of the PV to the MV can be approximated with dead time and a first-order lag system (or integral system). (The high order system shown in the above equation can also be approximated with dead time and a first-order lag system.)

7.5.2 Simulation Examples This section shows examples of self-tuning at a setpoint change, for the simulated model shown in the figure below, assuming that the control target type is MED and the PID control type is SVF. The examples show a case where the response before tuning is gradual and a case where it is oscillatory. Self-tuning can cause the system to converge rapidly almost the same desired response pattern from the different initial PID values in both cases.

Disturbance

PV

e–10S

1+10s

MV++

–+

PV

SV Self-tuning controller

Process model

Process model characteristic Gp (S) =

Gain: 1, time constant: 10 seconds, and dead time: 10 seconds 0710E.ai

Simulation Model

7-23IM 01B08B02-02EN


7

PVPV

SV

and PV

SV

Time (minutes)

(Response before STC operation) P = 160%, I = 20 seconds, D = 0 second, SFA = 1.0

00 1 2 3

20

40

60

80

100

SV

SV

and PV

Time (minutes)

(Response after STC operation ends) P = 89%, I = 14 seconds, D = 2 seconds, SFA = 0.465

00 1 2 3

20

40

60

80

100

0711E.ai

Simulation Example 1

PVPV

SV

00 1 2 3

20

40

60

80

100

SV

00 1 2 3

20

40

60

80

100

SV

and PV

Time (minutes)

(Response before STC operation) P = 80%, I = 20 seconds, D = 0 seconds, SFA = 1.0

SV

and PV

Time (minutes)

(Response after end of STC operation) P = 90%, I = 14 seconds, D = 2 seconds, SFA = 0.450

0712E.ai

Simulation Example 2

7.5 Simulation Test

7-24 IM 01B08B02-02EN

7.6 Application Guide

This section outlines the precautions, applications, etc. for applying the self-tuning (STC) function to various controlled systems and control loops.

7.6.1 Stable Control Loop (Continuous Control) For a stable control loop where the number of setpoint changes is few and the process characteristics change little, first determine the optimum PID parameter values using the STC function. Then operate the STC function by narrowing the PID parameter ranges using the PID limits, or turn OFF the STC function.

7.6.2 Controlling Processes Where Dead Time is a Dominant Factor It has been confirmed by simulation that if self-tuning (STC) is used together with basic PID control, good operating conditions are obtained until the ratio L/T (dead time/lag time constant) increases to 3. If the L/T ratio is greater than 3, simple PID control is difficult. In such cases, refer to Smith’s dead time compensation control or sample-and-hold PI control (S-PI). The STC function, however, cannot be used together with these controls.

7.6.3 Cascade Control If response in loop 2 is slow, as in temperature cascade control shown in the figure below, first set the optimum values to the Loop 2’s PID parameters, with the cascade open and then turn OFF the STC function. Then operate the STC function in loop 1. Generally, to avoid mutual interference, it is recommended that normally self-tuning be operated in loop 1 only, which is the main objective of the control.

TC1

TC2

Steam

Water

Raw material

Reactor

Split-range control valve

Cooling jacket

0713E.ai

Cascade Control

7-25IM 01B08B02-02EN


7

7.6.4 Following Fluctuations in Controlled System Characteristics (Dead Time, Lag Time, and Gain)

The example in the figure below is of a system that controls outgoing flow, F. In this system, because periodic fluctuations in inflow, (F1) into the tank are large, level control is activated, causing intermediate outgoing flow (F0), to fluctuate. The fluctuations in F0 are equivalent to the fluctuations in the gain of the process controlled by FIC. Regarding fluctuations in the characteristics of the controlled system, if the fluctuating period is longer than the natural oscillation period of the control loop, the STC function follows the fluctuations. If a change in PV response due to a controlled system characteristic change is detected, the STC function is activated. The STC function follows more promptly if a trigger from on-demand tuning exists. Set OD=ON (1) by key operation or communication.

LIC

Reflux flow

Level

FIC

Tank

PumpIntermediate outgoing flow

(F0)Outgoing flow

(F)Inflow (F1)

0714E.ai

Process with Gain Changes

7.6.5 Neutralization Process In the example of neutralizing control shown below, the pH control process exhibits a nonlinear characteristic which features extremely large gain in the vicinity of the neutralizing point, pH = 7, and small gains at both ends. If the STC function is directly applied to the pH controller, the optimum PID parameters are calculated in the vicinity of pH = 7, causing the proportional band to converge at the rate of several hundred percent. Thus, good control is not achieved. In such a case, linearize the characteristics by combining the STC function with the controller’s nonlinear elements before applying it.

pH

MV (neutralizer)

14

12

10

876

4

2

0

pHC

0714E.ai

Neutralizer

pH transmitter

Liquid to be controlled

Neutralization Control and pH Process Characteristics


7-26 IM 01B08B02-02EN

7.6.6 Controlling Tank Levels Having Integral Characteristics Level control as shown in the figure below is a process in which a constant flow pump is used to draw liquid at a constant flow rate regardless of the level. In this case, level H rises linearly as inflow, Q1, increases, showing that this process is an integral process without self-balancing. Integral process control becomes unstable if integral action I is increased; control is usually performed by PD action with the integral action weakened (i.e. with the integral time, TI, increased). In such an integral process, the self-tuning function (STC) is activated with the process type set IP = DYNAM. The STC function executes PD control by setting the integral time long if IP = DYNAM.

Constant flow

LIC

(H)

(Q1)

Constant flow pump

Inflow (Q1)

Liquid level (H)

t

0716E.ai

Level transmitter

Level Control

7.6.7 Control of Process with Hysteresis Characteristics As in the temperature control of a heating furnace or heat exchanger, there are cases where the process response times in the heating and cooling processes differ (see figure below). When self-tuning (STC) is to be applied to such a process, set the 95% process response time, TR, to the greater response time. The PID parameters fluctuate between those optimal to both processes according to the operating direction of the process variable (PV) response.

Time

Time

Step input

Heating process

Temperature

MV

PV

Cooling process0717E.ai

Hysteresis Characteristics (Step Response)


7-27IM 01B08B02-02EN


7

7.6.8 Control of Process with Slow Response of Final Control Element When a motor valve is used for flow control as shown in the figure below, the motor valve’s response time may become a dominant control factor as it is greater than the flowmeter’s response time. If self-tuning (STC) is applied to the system, the proportional band (PB) is set somewhat larger than in cases where lag in the final control element would not exist. This is because the STC function estimates process characteristics including a lag in the final control element. If it is necessary to further improve controllability, add phase compensation and the like by first-order lead computation to compensate for the derivative action (D). (Refer to the figure below.)

PID+

–

+

–

a: First-order lead computation gain TD: First-order lead time constant

aTDs1+TDs

FIC

M

0718E.ai

Flowm

eter

Motor valve

Flow Control by a Motor Valve and Output Compensation by First-order Lead Computation

7.6.9 Control Using Program Pattern If the self-tuning function (STC) is to be applied to a programmed control in which the temperature controller setpoint (SV) is changed along a certain temperature increase/decrease pattern as shown in the figure below, the following points should be noted. Select either PV derivative type PID (PI-D) or adjustable setpoint filter (SVF) for the control operation formula (ALG). PV proportional PID (I-PD) increases the difficulty of following up setpoint (SV) changes. To minimize overshoot when the temperature rise reaches the programmed temperature, set the STC control target type to OS = ZERO and select SVF. Generally, if the SV changes gradually in a ramp as seen in increasing or decreasing temperature, the PID controller causes an offset. When on-demand tuning (OD) is executed to eliminate the offset, the offset decreases because the manipulated output variable (MV) is applied in the direction that decreases the control deviation. At the same time, the PID parameters are computed from the response and set.

TIC

TPG

Fuel

Temperature pattern generator

Time

Temperature patternTemperature

Heat treatm

ent furnace

0719E.ai

Programmed Temperature Control


7-28 IM 01B08B02-02EN

7.6.10 Combining Control with Sequence Control (Batch Control) A simple batch control process may be affected by a large disturbance, such as the additional charge of a large amount of raw materials or the extraction of products during PID control that exceeds the practical correction range in feedback control. In such cases, compose a sequence to temporarily stop the self-tuning function (STC) using the STC start/stop function (see the figure below). If the setpoint (SV) is to remain constant when the operation mode is in automatic control (A) or in cascade setting automatic control (C) after a batch is completed, stop the STC function to prevent unnecessary STC operation (see the figure below). The STC function cannot be used if batch PID control (BATCH) is used for the control operation formula (ALG).

TimeSTC stop

SV

PV

STC stop

Batch endAdditional raw material charge

Temperature

0720E.ai

Batch Control

7.6.11 Control of Loops with Interference When it is Not Possible to Eliminate Inference If the self-tuning function (STC) is operated in both loops of a system with interference such as in the pressure control – flow control system shown in the figure below, oscillation occurs due to the interference as the PID parameters converge to the optimum values. In such cases, stop the STC function in the controller in which fluctuation in the process variable (PV) is permitted, select a larger proportional band (PB) and integral time (TI) (e.g., PB = 100 to 200%, TI = 30 to 80 seconds), and apply the STC function only to the other controller.

PC FC

0721E.ai

Pressure

Temperature

Pressure Control and Flow Rate Control


7-29IM 01B08B02-02EN


7

When it is Possible to Eliminate Inference If mutual interference exists, such as in the top and bottom temperature controls of a distillation tower, first carry out non-interference control as illustrated below and configure the self-tuning function (STC) with the suitable non-interference effects.

TC1 PID controller

m2

m1

T1

T2

×

×

TC1

TC2

g21

g22

g12

g11

+

LL-1

LL-2

+

FC

0722E.aiD

istillation tower

Non-interference Control of a Distillation Tower, etc.

Non-interference Control: In the figure above, assume that the transfer function between the output mi of the controller TCi and temperature Tj is gij. By adding non-interference elements LL-1 and LL-2 to the system, T1 and T2 are represented as follows. (Equation) where i = 1 to 2, j = 1 to 2 As a result, two independent control loops are obtained.

7.6.12 Control of a Loop Having Impulse Noise The self-tuning function (STC) estimates the process characteristics after removing impulse noise. If noise occurs frequently, set a noise band (NB). If noise frequently occurs for short intervals (TR/10 or less), consider noise rejection using a filter. TR: 95% process response time


Blank Page

8-1IM 01B08B02-02EN

Maintenance

8

WARNING For products with optional code /FM or /CSA:(1) Devices must be maintained by professionally trained personnel or ask

YOKOGAWA's sales office or sales representative.(2) In case of option code /FM, install devices according to NEC (National

Electrical Code: ANSI/NFPA-70). In case of option code /CSA, install devices according to CEC(Canadian

Electric Code:C22. 1-06).

CAUTION If the instrument’s front panel becomes soiled or dusty, wipe it gently using a dry, soft cloth. Do not use organic solvents, chemicals, or chemically treated dust cloths. Doing so may result in the instrument case becoming deformed or discolored.

8.1 Inspecting Indication Accuracy

As a guideline, indication accuracy should be inspected on an annual basis.

8.1.1 Calibration Instruments

Name Description Number of Units

DC voltage standard Yokogawa 7651 or equivalent 1

Digital multimeter Yokogawa 7561 or equivalent 1

Chapter 8 Maintenance

8-2 IM 01B08B02-02EN

8.1.2 Inspecting Input Indication AccuracyFollow the procedure below to specifically check input indication accuracy. YS1500 has four analog inputs, while YS1700 has eight analog inputs including expandable I/O.

(1) Apply a voltage of 1.0 V DC to the analog input terminals using the voltage standard. (2) On the Input and Output Data Display of the Tuning Display, check that the analog

input signal concerned is equivalent to 0 ±0.1% in the engineering unit.(3) Similarly, apply a voltage of 5.0 V DC to check that the analog input signal concerned

is equivalent to 100 ±0.1% in the engineering unit.


X1 Analog input 1 −25.0 to 125.0

Tuning Display > [I/O DATA] (Input and Output Data Display)




X5 Analog input 5/Direct input signal output (*1) −25.0 to 125.0

X6 Analog input 6 (*2) −25.0 to 125.0

X7 Analog input 7 (*2) −25.0 to 125.0

X8 Analog input 8 (*2) −25.0 to 125.0

*1: This parameter is displayed only in YS1700. If the direct input optional code is specified, it becomes a direct input signal output.

*2: These parameters are displayed only in the YS1700 basic type (with expandable I/O).

8.1.3 Inspecting Output Indication Accuracy Follow the procedure below to specifically check output indication accuracy. YS1500 has three analog outputs, while YS1700 has four analog outputs including expandable I/O.

(1) Connect the digital multimeter to the terminals in the current mode if the analog output terminals are current outputs, or in the voltage mode if they are voltage outputs.

Set the Y2S, Y3S and Y4S to MV on the Configuration Display 1 of the Engineering Display.

(2) Set the operation mode to manual control. (3) On the LOOP 1 Display, manipulated the MV and set the MV1 to 0%. (4) Verify that the reading is 4 mA DC for current output, or that it is 1.0 V DC for voltage

output. (Tolerance is ±0.2% for current output or ±0.1% for voltage output.) (*2)(5) Similarly, set the MV to 100% to check that the reading is 20 mA DC for current output

and that it is 5.0 V DC for voltage output. (Tolerance is ±0.2% for current output or ±0.1% for voltage output.)


Y1 Analog output 1 −20.0 to 106.3 Tuning Display > [I/O DATA] (Input and Output Data Display)

Y2 Analog output 2 −6.3 to 106.3

Y3 Analog output 3 −6.3 to 106.3

Y4 Analog output 4 (*1) −6.3 to 106.3

*1: This parameter is displayed only in the YS1700 basic type (with expandable I/O). *2: Tolerance is ±0.2 for analog output 4(voltage output).

8.1 Inspecting Indication Accuracy

8-3IM 01B08B02-02EN

Maintenance

8

8.2 Recommended Part Replacement Period

The following shows the replaceable part of the YS1000 and the recommended replacement period.

Replaceable Part Recommended Replacement Period

LCD Display Assembly About 8 years

WARNING Part replacement should be carried out by a YOKOGAWA engineer or an engineer certified by YOKOGAWA, as safety standard inspection is required. Contact YOKOGAWA's sales office or sales representative when replacing the parts.

CAUTIONNotes regarding parts with finite life spans (1) Parts with finite life spans refer to those in which the abrasion or failure period

is expected to be reached within 10 years under normal operating or storage conditions. Therefore, parts with life spans of more than 10 years in terms of design are not mentioned here.

(2) The recommended replacement period establishes the period at which preventive maintenance is to be conducted on parts with finite life spans. It does not constitute assurance against incidental failure.

(3) The recommended replacement period is only a guideline and differs depending on operating conditions.

(4) The recommended replacement period may be changed according to field records, etc.

8-4 IM 01B08B02-02EN

8.3 Packaging when Shipping the Product for Repair

Should the instrument break down and need to be shipped to our sales representative for repair, handle it as noted below:

WARNING Prior to shipping the instrument, put it into an antistatic bag and repackage it using the original internal packaging materials and packaging container.

9-1IM 01B08B02-02EN

Specifications

9

9.1 General Specifications

WARNING This instrument is for Measurement Category O (other). Do not use it for measurements in locations falling under Measurement Categories II, III, and IV.

IVIII

O

IIEntrance Cable

Internal Wiring

Outlet

Measurement Category

Description Remarks

O (other) For measurements performed on circuits not directly connected to MAINS.

II CAT.II For measurements performed on circuits directly connected to the low voltage installation.

Appliances, portable equipments, etc.

III CAT.III For measurements performed in the building installation.

Distribution board, circuit breaker, etc.

IV CAT.IV For measurements performed at the source of the low-voltage installation.

Overhead wire, cable systems, etc.

Input and Output Signals

Analog input signals (Measurement Category O (other))Rated voltage to earth of measuring circuit terminal: 33 VACrms (50/60 Hz) or 70 V DC

Item YS1700 Programmable Mode YS1700 Multi-function Mode, YS1500

1 to 5 V DC (basic type) 5 points 4 points 1 to 5 V DC (YS1700 basic type (with expandable I/O))

8 points 5 points

Direct input (*1) (optional specifications) One out of the above number of points can be used.

Input Resistance 1 MΩ or more

*1: One of mV, thermocouple, RTD, potentiometers, two-wire transmitters, input isolators, or frequency inputs

Analog output signals Item YS1700 Programmable Mode YS1700 Multi-function Mode, YS1500

4 to 20 mA (basic type) 1 point

1 to 5 V DC (basic type) 2 points

(One of which can be switched to output 4 to 20 mA.)

2 points

1 to 5 V DC (YS1700 basic type (with expandable I/O))

3 points (One of which can be switched to output

4 to 20 mA.) 3 points

Item YS1700 Programmable Mode YS1700 Multi-function Mode, YS1500

4 to 20 mA 0 to 750 Ω

1 to 5 V DC (analog output 2, 3) 2 kΩ or more

1 to 5 V DC (analog output 4) 10 kΩ or more

Chapter 9 Specifications

9-2 IM 01B08B02-02EN

The current output provides a forced full-closing function for valves (final control elements).When a signal decreases, if an output signal becomes -6% (equivalent to 3.04 mA) or less, the current output decreases abruptly, reaching -20% (equivalent to 0.8 mA). When a signal increases, if the output signal reaches -5% or more, the current output is released from -20% (equivalent to 0.8 mA) and returns to -5% (equivalent to 3.2 mA). When the output signal is 100% or more, the current output increases linearly and is limited at approximately 106.25% (21 mA).

21

Output Signal(%)

Current Output(mA)

20

4

3.23.04

0.8

0 100 106.25-6 -5

0902E.ai

Digital inputsItem YS1700 Programmable Mode YS1700 Multi-function Mode, YS1500

Digital input (basic type) 6 points (shared by digital output signals) Digital input (YS1700 basic type (with expandable I/O))

6 points (shared by digital output signals) + 4 points (common line shared)

Input Signal ON OFF

For no-voltage contact (*1) (*2) Closed Resistance: 200 Ω or less

Open Resistance: 100 kΩ or more

For voltage contact (*2) LOW Input voltage: −0.5 to 1 V DC

HIGH Input voltage: 4.5 to 30 V DC

*1: Input contact rating: 5 V DC, 20 mA or more Minimum pulse width: For YS1700 programmable mode

220 ms (control period of 200 ms) 120 ms (control period of 100 ms) 70 ms (control period of 50 ms)

Minimum pulse width: 120 ms for YS1700 multi-function mode and YS1500 *2: No-voltage contacts and voltage contacts may be received at the same terminals.


9-3IM 01B08B02-02EN

Specifications

9

Digital outputsItem YS1700 Programmable Mode YS1700 Multi-function Mode, YS1500

Digital output (basic type) 6 points (shared by digital input signals) Digital output (YS1700 basic type (with expandable I/O))

6 points (shared by digital input signals) + 4 points (minus line common)

Transistor contact Rating 30 V DC, 200 mA or less (resistive load)

FAIL output (*1) 1 point

Transistor contact Rating 30 V DC, 200 mA or less (resistive load)

*1: FAIL contact output enters the OFF status at power OFF or failure. For contact action (ON in normal condition), it is normally closed.

Isolation of Signals from Each Other

Item YS1500/ YS1700 Basic Type Expandable Terminal Signals of YS1700 Basic Type (with Expandable I/O)

Analog input and output signal

Not isolated from the computation control circuit. Signals are not isolated from each other. The negative line is shared. Isolated from other input and output signals.

Direct input

With the exception of 2-wire transmitters (not isolated), input signals are isolated from the

computation control circuit. Isolated from the power supply circuit, and other input and output signals.

−

Digital input and output signal

Isolated from the computation control circuit, between the signals, and from other input and

output signals

Isolated from the computation control circuit and from other input and output signals, but not isolated between the signals (isolated between DI and DO).

The negative line is shared.

FAIL signal Isolated from the computation control circuit and from other input and output signals −

Communication Isolated from the computation control circuit and from other input and output signals −

Power supply Isolated from the computation control circuit and from other input and output signals −

Grounding Isolated from the computation control circuit and from other input and output signals −

Isolation Block Diagram

Power supply

Grounding

Analog input and output Computation control circuit Transmitter power supply Programmer communication

DI/DO

Expandable DO

Expandable DI

Direct input (optional specifications) (*1)

*1: With the exception of 2-wire transmitters (non-isolated) *2: YS1700 basic type (with expandable I/O) only *3: Minus line common *4: Isolation between inputs and outputs

FAIL(DO)

Communication (Optional code

/A31 or /A32)

Communication (Optional code /A34)

0901E.ai

Grounding

Power supply

Analog input: 1 to 5

Analog input: 6 to 8 (*2)

Analog output: 1 to 3

Analog output: 4 (*2)

Digital input/output(6 points shared) (*4)

FAIL output

RS-232C communicationTransmitter power supply

Digital output: 6 to 10 (*2), (*3)

Digital input: 6 to 10 (*2), (*3)

Direct input signal

RS-485 communication or DCS-LCS communication

Ethernet communication


9-4 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Transmitter Power Supply Item Specifications

Output voltage 25 to 25.5 V DC

Load 60 mA or less (30 mA or less if there is direct input) Short-circuit protection 80 mA ±10 mA

Others No effect on the computation control circuit if a short circuit occurs.

Not isolated from the computation circuit. An external resistor for 1–5 V conversion (250 Ω) should be provided.

Communication Signal Specifications

Item Programmer

Communication (Used for YSS1000)

RS-485 Communication DCS-LCS Communication

Ethernet Communication

Electrical Specifications Complies with RS-232C Complies with EIA

RS-485 Yokogawa’s proprietary

one

Complies with IEEE 802.3

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

Connection Dedicated front panel connector

Rear panel screw terminals

(Five terminals and the grounding terminal)

Back panel screw terminal(2 terminals)

Back panel RJ45 connector

Number connectable instruments

1 unit Maximum of 31 units/port 8 modules/LCS card

Up to 4-tier cascade stack (10BASE-T)

Up to 2-tier stack (100BASE-TX) (*1)

Number of connection: 2

Applicable cable Dedicated cable A1053UR

(USB/RS-232C conversion cable)

Shielded twisted-pair cableWire size: 0.5 to 1.25 mm2

(AWG No. 20 to 16)

Dedicated shielded twisted-pair cable(Model: SCCD)

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cable

Cable length About 2.7 m Up to 1200m (1.25 mm2) Up to100 m 100 m (*2)

*1: Number of cascade connected hubs*2: Maximum segment length (length between hub and YS1000)


9-5IM 01B08B02-02EN

Specifications

9

Operating Conditions Normal operating conditions, transport and storage conditions

Item Normal Operation Transport and Storage Ambient temperature 0 to 50°C −20 to 60°C

Ambient humidity 5 to 90% RH (No condensation)

5 to 95% RH (No condensation)

Power Supply voltage (AC) (*1)

80 to 138 V AC (100 V AC and 24 V AC common power supply)

138 to 264 V AC (220 V AC power supply) –

Power supply frequency (AC) 50/60 Hz ±3Hz –

Power Supply voltage (DC) (*1)

20 to 132 V DC (100 V AC and 24 V DC common power supply)

120 to 340 V DC (220 V AC power supply) –

Continuous vibration

5 to 14 Hz, amplitude : 0.625 mm or less 14 to 150 Hz, 4.9 m/s2 or less, orthogonal three-directional, with 2 hours each

Short-time vibration 14.7 m/s2, 15 s or less

Shock 49 m/s2 (5 G) or less 11 ms or less

Package drop – Within 1 m

Magnetic field 400 A/m or less

Hazardous gas There shall be no corrosive gas in the location.Installation altitude 2000 m above the sea or less

Atmospheric pressure 86 k to 106 kPa

*1: Safety standards, FM and CSA non-incendive standard compliant conditions apply at the following rated power supply.Rated power supply: use of both AC and DC 100 V AC and 24 V DC common power supply DC drive: 24 - 120 V DC (±10%), no polarity, 750 mA MAX. AC drive: 100 - 120 V AC (±10%), 50/60 Hz (±3 Hz), 30 VA MAX. 220 V AC power supply DC drive: 135 - 190 V DC (±10%), no polarity, 110 mA MAX. AC drive: 220 - 240 V AC (±10%), 50/60 Hz (±3 Hz), 30 VA MAX.


9-6 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Reference Operating Conditions Ambient temperature: 23°C ±2°C, relative humidity: 50% ±10% RH Note that the power supply voltage is as specified below: 100 V AC and 24 V DC common power supply: 24 V DC or 100 V AC, 50/60 Hz 220 V AC power supply: 135 V DC or 220 V AC, 50/60 Hz

Reference PerformanceItem Specifications

Input and output conversion accuracy rating 1 to 5 V input signal ±0.1% of span

Direct input ±0.5% or ±(2 × |direct input card’s accuracy| + 0.1%)

Analog voltage output 2, 3 ±0.1% of span

Analog voltage output 4 ±0.2% of span

Analog current output ±0.2% of span

Allowable input voltage/current (*1)

1 to 5 V signal ±30 V DC

Direct input signal (mV, TC) −0.5 to 4 V DC

Direct input signal (distributor) 40 mA DC

Warm-up time 1 minute (time taken by the instrument to reach accuracy after power on), but 3 minutes in the case of direct input

Current consumption and power consumption

100 V AC and 24 V DC common power supply 750 mA (20 to 132 V DC) 30 VA (80 to 138 V AC) 220 V AC power supply

110 mA (120 to 340 V DC) 30 VA (138 to 264 V AC)

Insulation resistance

100 MΩ Test voltage = 500 V DC

Input or output terminal to grounding terminal, power supply terminal to grounding terminal

Withstand voltage

Between input/output terminal and ground terminal

1000 VAC for one minute (In the case of suffix codes -0,

-1, or -2)500 VAC for one minute (In

the case of suffix codes -3, -4, or -5)

Between power supply terminal (L, N) and (all I/O

terminal and ground terminal)

3000 VAC for one minute (In the case of suffix codes -0,

-1, or -2)Between power supply

terminal (L, N) and ground terminal

1500 VAC for one minute

LCD replacement period 8 years

*1: Measurement category according to IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61010-2-030: O (other)


9-7IM 01B08B02-02EN

Specifications

9

Influence of Operating ConditionsItem Specifications

Influence of power supply voltage variations |Accuracy|

Influence of input lead resistance 0.13% (per 1 kΩ)

Influence of load resistance

|Accuracy|/5 2 kΩ to ∞ 1 to 5 V output (analog output 2,3),10 kΩ to ∞ 1 to 5 V output (analog output 4),

0 to 750 Ω 4 to 20 mA Common mode noise rejection ratio 83 dB (1 to 5 V input) 50/60 Hz

Series mode noise rejection ratio 46 dB (1 to 5 V input) 50/60 Hz

Influence of magnetic field |Accuracy|/5 (400 A/m, 50/60 Hz or DC)

Influence of ambient temperature |Accuracy| (per 10°C in the range of 0 to 50°C)

Influence of ambient humidity |Accuracy| (50 to 93% RH, 40°C)

Direct Input SpecificationsItem mV Input Thermocouple Input

Optional code /A01 /A02

Input signal DC potential difference: −50 to +150 mV

JIS, ANSI standards Thermocouple types K, T, J, E, B, R,

and S IEC and ANSI standards

Type N

Measuring range span 10 to 100 mV DC 10 to 63 mV (thermoelectric power equivalent)

Measuring range zero elevation

Within whichever is smaller, three times the span or ±50 mV

Within whichever is smaller, three times the span or ±25 mV

Measuring range Changeable on Engineering Display Input resistor 1 MΩ (3 kΩ at power failure) External input resistor 500 Ω or less Allowable input voltage and current −0.5 to 4 V DC

Input l linearization Not provided Provided 1 to 5 V output conversion accuracy rating

Within ±0.2% of span Whichever is greater, ±0.2% of span or input equivalent ±20 µV

Reference junction compensation error − Within ±1°C (*1)

*1: Type B does not conduct reference junction temperature compensation. For types other than type B, the value obtained by multiplying the noted value by the following

coefficient (K) applies if the measurement temperature is 0°C or less. K = (thermoelectric power for 1°C near 0°C) / (thermoelectric power for 1°C at measurement

temperature)


9-8 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Item Resistance Temperature Detector Input Potentiometer Input

Optional code /A03 /A04

Input signal

RTDPt 100 (IPTS-68: JIS ’89),

JPt 100 (JIS ’89), Pt 100 (ITS-90: JIS ’97),

Pt 50 (JIS ’81)Three-wire type

Measurement current: 1 mA

Potentiometer three-wire type

Measuring range span 10 to 650°C (Pt 100)10 to 500°C (JPt 100)

Total resistance: 100 to 2000 Ω Span: 80 to 2000 Ω

Measuring range zero elevation Within five times the span 50% or less of total resistance

Measuring range Changeable on Engineering Display External input resistance 10 Ω or less per wire (*1) 10 Ω or less per wire Input linearization Provided Not provided 1 to 5 V output conversion accuracy rating

Whichever is greater, ±0.2% of span or ±0.2°C Within ±0.2% of span

*1: The value shall be equal or less than the smaller value out of 10 Ω per wire or (measurement temperature span) × 0.4 Ω.

Item Isolator 2-wire Transmitter Input

(Isolated), 2-wire Transmitter Input (Non-isolated)

Optional code /A05 /A06, /A07

Input signal 1 to 5 V DC4 to 20 mA DC signal from 2-wire

transmitter (Power is supplied to a transmitter.)

Input resistance 1 MΩ (100 kΩ at power failure) 250Ω

External input resistance −RL = (20 − transmitter’s minimum operating voltage)/0.02 A (Ω) or

less Allowable input voltage and current ±30VDC 40mADC

Input linearization Not provided Not provided 1 to 5 V output conversion accuracy rating

Within ±0.2% of span


9-9IM 01B08B02-02EN

Specifications

9

Item Frequency Input Optional code /A08

Input signal 2-wire type: Contact, voltage pulse, current pulse (power supply to

transmitter is also possible) 3-wire type: Power supply type voltage pulse

Input frequency 0 to 10 kHz 100% frequency 0.1 to 10 kHz Zero elevation 0 to 50% can be set for 100% input frequency.Measuring range Changeable on Engineering Display Low level input cutoff point

Setting range: 0.01 Hz (and 1% of maximum frequency) to 100% input frequency.

Minimum input pulse width

ON: 60 µs, OFF: 60 µs (input frequency: 0 to 6 kHz) ON: 30 µs, OFF: 30 µs (input frequency: 6 to 10 kHz)

Input signal level

Contact input: relay contact, transistor contact Open/close detection level: Open: 100 kΩ or more, Close: 200 Ω or

less Contact capacity: 15 V DC, 15 mA or more

Voltage/current pulse input: Low level: −1 to +8 V, High level: +3 to +24 V

Pulse peak value: 3 V or more (input frequency: 0 to 6 kHz) 5 V or more (input frequency: 6 to 10 kHz)

Internal load resistance (for current pulse input) Selectable from 200 Ω, 500 Ω, and 1 kΩ; to be specified when ordering

Input filter Selectable whether to add a 10 ms filter (for no-voltage contact); to be specified when ordering

Power supply for transmitter

Selectable from 12 V DC at 30 mA, and 24 V DC at 30 mA; to be specified when ordering

1 to 5 V output conversion accuracy rating

Within ±0.2% of span

Structure, Mounting (Basic Type)Item Specifications

Structure Front panel drip and dust proof structure (compliant with IP54).

Not applicable for side-by-side mounting instrumentation, and replacement types.

Mounting type Indoor panel mounting

Panel mounting device Mounting brackets to be used (at the top and bottom))

Panel cutout 137+2 × 68+0.7 (mm)

Connection method

External signal connection M4-screw terminal connection

Power supply and grounding connection

M4-screw terminal connection

External Dimensions 144 × 72 × 250 mm (height × width × depth from the panel)

Weight 1.6kg


9-10 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Safety Standards General safety standards (suffix codes -0, -1, or -2 only) IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61010-2-030 compliant Overvolatage category: II, Pollution degree: 2 Measurement category: O (other)

Compliant with CAN/CSA-C22.2 for suffix codes -0, -1, or -2 and option code /CSA

CSA: CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO. 61010-1 and CAN/CSA-C22.2, NO. 61010-2-030 Overvoltage category: II Pollution Degree: 2 Measurement category: O (other)

Notes regarding safety standards 1) The internal unit alone is not covered by the safety standards. The products comply with the safety standards when configured in combination

with the internal unit and the safety standard-compliant case or safety standard-compliant housing.

2) The following work involving removing the internal unit from the case and reinstalling it in the case requires safety verification, as specified by the safety standards (IEC/EN 61010-1).

Such work must be carried out by a YOKOGAWA engineer or by YOKOGAWA-approved personnel and must be subjected to inspection (such as withstand tests) to verify safety. If the work is carried out at the customer’s own risk, the instrument concerned cannot be regarded as being compatible with the safety standards.

[1] Removal of the internal unit from the case, replacing the internal unit with a new one, and subsequently installing it to the case/housing

[2] Replacement and installation of the power supply unit, or optional board [3] Maintenance or repair requiring removal of the internal unit from the case

EMC standards (suffix codes -0, -1, or -2 only) Use a ferrite core and an arrester to comply with the standards. EN61326-1 Class A, Table 2 (For use in industrial locations) EN61326-2-3 EN55011 Class A Group 1 EN61000-3-2 Class A EN61000-3-3 Note: The instrument continues operating at a measuring accuracy of within ±20% of

the range during testing.

KC marking: Electromagnetic wave interference prevention standard, electromagnetic wave protection standard compliance.

EMC Regulatory Arrangement in Australia and New Zealand EN 55011 Class A, Group 1

CAUTION This instrument is a class A product (use in commercial and industrial areas). In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user needs to take adequate measures.


9-11IM 01B08B02-02EN

Specifications

9

Hazardous location usage certification: Non-incendive electric equipment that is used in hazardous locations (optional code /FM, /CSA only) (To be approved)

FM standards: FM No. 3611 Location: Class I, Division 2, Groups, A, B, C and D Class I, Zone 2, Groups II C Temperature code: T4 CSA nonincendive C22.2 No.213-M1987 Locations: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D Temperature Code T4

Hazardous location usage conditions: (Note 2), (Note 6)

0601E.ai

Hazardous (Classified)Location Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D

Hazardous (Classified)Location Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D

YS1000 SeriesSingle-loop Controller

AssociatedApparatus

(Note 3)(Note 4)(Note 5)

ControlEquipment

(Note 1)

Non-hazardous (Classified)Location

Non-incendive Field Wiring Parameter:Output signal Signal name Voc (V) Isc (mA) Ca (uF) La (mH) Remark

Analog Output (Y1, Y3I) Current output 23.5 21.0 0.3 10Analog Output (Y2, Y3V, Y4) Voltage output 5.25 6.3 0.9 50Loop power supply for transmitter (LPS)

Power supply 25.5 90 0.2 1 *1

Digital Input (DI1 to DI10) Non-voltage contact 7.25 20 0.9 50RS-485 4.4 250 0.9 1The Non-incendive field wiring concept allows interconnection of two FM Approved Non-incendive Apparatuses with Non-incendive field wiring parameters not specifically examined in combination as a system when: Voc ≤ Vmax, Isc ≤ Imax, Ca ≥ Ci + C cable, La ≥ Li + L cable*1: Upon condition that a shunt resistor YS021 (250 Ω ±0.1%, 3W) is attached.

Input signal Signal name Vmax (V) Imax (mA) Ci (uF) Li (mH) RemarkAnalog Input (X1 to X8) Voltage input 30 0.034 0.001 0Digital Output (DO1 to DO10)

Transister output 30 200 0 0 *2

DCS-LCS Communication

Transister output 8.5 24 0.0001 0.07

The Non-incendive field wiring concept allows interconnection of two FM Approved Non-incendive Apparatuses with Non-incendive field wiring parameters not specifically examined in combination as a system when: Voc or Vt ≤ Vmax, Isc or It ≤ Imax. Ca ≥ Ci + C cable, La ≥ Li + L cable*2: Class I, Division 2 Wiring required.


9-12 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Notes:1. Control equipment connected to the YS1000 series single-loop controller must not use or

generate more than 250 Vrms or VDC.2. In case of option code /FM, install devices according to NEC (National Electrical Code: ANSI/

NFPA-70). In case of option code /CSA, install devices according to CEC(Canadian Electric Code:C22. 1-06).

3. The configuration of associated Apparatus must be FMRC Approval under Non-incendive Field Wiring Concept or be a simple apparatus (a device which can neither generate nor store more than 1.2 V, 0.1 A, 25 mW, or 20 µJ, e.g. Switches, thermocouples, LED's and RTD's).

4. Associated Apparatus manufacture's installation drawing must be followed when installing this equipment.

5. Associated Apparatus connection is representative of each input and output signal connection. Each signal shall be wired in a separate shielded cable.

6. No revision to drawing without prior FMRC Approval.

Parameter of the Device which Gives EnergyVoc: maximum open-circuit output voltage

Maximum voltage that occurs at the open terminal (part) when the Non-incendive (NI) circuit is open

Isc: maximum short-circuit output current Maximum current which currents when the NI circuit is short and earth fault

Ca: maximum allowable capacitance Maximum capacitance that can be connected to the NI circuit

La: maximum allowable inductance Maximum inductance that can be connected to the NI circuit

Parameter of the Device which Receives EnergyVmax: maximum input voltage

Maximum voltage that maintains the NI properties of the deviceImax: maximum input current

Maximum current that maintains the properties of the deviceCi: maximum internal capacitance

Maximum internal capacitance of the device that can be considered to conduct to the NI circuit (the external wiring) when the device is connected to the NI circuit (the external wiring)

Li: maximum internal inductance Maximum internal inductance of the device that can be considered to conduct to

the NI circuit (the external wiring) when the device is connected to the NI circuit (the external wiring)


Index-1IM 01B08B02-02EN

Index

Index

Index

Numeric10-segment Linearizer .......................................................... 2-2

AActive Color Display ............................................................ 2-11Adjustable Setpoint Filter................................................... 1-114Alarm Function ................................................................... 2-13Alternate Tag Number Color Display .................................. 2-12Analog Outputs ................................................................... 3-14Application Guide ............................................................... 7-24Automatic Control ................................................. 1-7,1-27,1-55Automatic operation backup mode ..................... 1-11,1-34,1-63Automatic switching ........................................................ 3-4,3-7

BBackground color................................................................ 4-10Backup mode...................................................... 1-11,1-34,1-63Batch PID Control ............................................................. 1-126Burnout ................................................................................. 5-5

CCalibration Instruments......................................................... 8-1Cascade Mode ................................................................... 1-23Cascade setting automatic control ..................... 1-11,1-34,1-62Cascade Setting Value Tracking ........................................... 2-5Cascade switching................................................................ 3-7Contact Type .................................................................. 3-2,3-3Control elements .................................................. 1-6,1-26,1-54Controller Mode .................................................................... 1-1Control Method ................................................................. 1-104Control operation direction ................................................... 2-7Control Operation Formula ALG ....................................... 1-104Control period ................................................................. 1-1,1-2Control Type ..................................................................... 1-104Current/voltage switching ................................................... 3-13

DDDC mode .......................................................... 1-11,1-34,1-62Dead Time ........................................................................ 1-124Deletion Guide Display Language ...................................... 2-10Digital Input and Output ........................................................ 3-1Direct Input ........................................................................... 5-1Display Data on the TREND 3 Display ................................. 4-5Display Function ................................................................... 4-1During Power Failures .......................................................... 6-1

EEMC standards ................................................................... 9-10Event Display........................................................................ 2-9Event flag............................................................................ 2-10

FFeedforward Control ......................................................... 1-121First-order Lag Operation ..................................................... 2-1

HHazardous location usage certification ................................ 9-11Hysteresis ........................................................................... 2-14

IIndication Accuracy............................................................... 8-1Input Filter............................................................................. 2-1

KKeylock ............................................................................... 4-12

LLCD backlight off .................................................................. 3-7LCD Brightness ................................................................... 4-11Local/remote switching ......................................................... 3-6Loop Colors ........................................................................ 4-10Low Cutoff Adjustable ........................................................... 2-1

MManual Control ..................................................... 1-7,1-27,1-55Manual operation backup mode ......................... 1-11,1-34,1-63Manual switching ............................................................ 3-4,3-7Messages ............................................................................. 2-9Multi-function mode ........................................................ 1-1,1-2

NNeutralization Control ................................... 1-117,1-119,1-122Neutralization Process........................................................ 7-25Non-linear PID Control ...................................................... 1-117

OOFF timer ............................................................................. 4-9OPEN and CLOSE ..................................................... 1-28,1-33Open/close .......................................................................... 3-11Open/close switching............................................................ 3-6Operation Display ........................................................... 4-1,4-8Output Limiter ................................................................... 1-108Output preset and manual switching .................................... 3-5Output Tracking .................................................................... 2-4Output tracking switching ..................................................... 3-5

PPart Replacement ................................................................. 8-3Password ............................................................................ 4-13PID Control with Reset Bias .............................................. 1-112Power-on initial display ......................................................... 4-8Preset MV ............................................................................. 2-8Preset MV switching ............................................................. 3-5Preset PID ........................................................................ 1-127Process Variable Tracking .................................................... 2-6Programmable Mode ........................................................ 1-103Proportional (PD) Control ................................................. 1-109PV Derivative Type PID .................................................... 1-107PV Proportional Type ........................................................ 1-106

RRatio Operation .................................................................... 2-3REMOTE and LOCAL ........................................................ 1-63Remote/local........................................................................ 3-11Repair ................................................................................... 8-4Reset windup .......................................................... 1-108,1-112

Index-2 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Index

SSafety Standards ................................................................ 9-10Sample-and-hold PI Control ............................................. 1-124Scale..................................................................................... 4-7Scale Divisions ............................................................... 4-6,4-7Security Function ................................................................ 4-12Selector Mode .................................................................... 1-51Selector selection ................................................................. 3-6Self-tuning ............................................................................ 7-1Self-tuning Alarms .............................................................. 7-20Self-tuning switching............................................................. 3-6Sensor Type ......................................................................... 5-4Simulation Display .............................................................. 2-10Simulation Test ................................................................... 7-22Single-loop Mode.................................................................. 1-3Span Adjustment .................................................................. 5-6SPC mode .......................................................... 1-11,1-34,1-62Specifications ....................................................................... 9-1Square Root Extraction ........................................................ 2-1Status output ................................................................ 3-9,3-11Step Response .................................................................. 1-114

TTime Span ............................................................................ 4-4Tracking ................................................................................ 2-4TREND Display .............................................................. 4-3,4-4

VValve Direction ...................................................................... 2-7

ZZero Adjustment ................................................................... 5-6

i

Revision Information Title : YS1500 Indicating Controller/YS1700 Programmable Indicating Controller User’s Manual Manual No. : IM 01B08B02-02EN

Jun. 2014/1st EditionNewly published

n Written by Yokogawa Electric Corporation n Published by Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo 180-8750, JAPAN

Blank Page

YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATIONHeadquarters2-9-32, Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo, 180-8750 JAPANPhone : 81-422-52-5555

Branch Sales OfficesOsaka, Nagoya, Hiroshima, Kurashiki, Fukuoka, Kitakyusyu

YOKOGAWA CORPORATION OF AMERICAHead Office12530 West Airport Blvd, Sugar Land, Texas 77478, USAPhone : 1-281-340-3800 Fax : 1-281-340-3838

Georgia Office2 Dart Road, Newnan, Georgia 30265, USA Phone : 1-800-888-6400/ 1-770-253-7000 Fax : 1-770-254-0928

YOKOGAWA AMERICA DO SUL LTDA.Praca Acapulco, 31 - Santo Amaro, Sáo Paulo/SP, BRAZIL, CEP-04675-190Phone : 55-11-5681-2400 Fax : 55-11-5681-4434

YOKOGAWA EUROPE B. V.Euroweg 2, 3825 HD Amersfoort, THE NETHERLANDSPhone : 31-88-4641000 Fax : 31-88-4641111

YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC CIS LTD.Grokholskiy per 13 Building 2, 4th Floor 129090, Moscow, RUSSIAPhone : 7-495-737-7868 Fax : 7-495-737-7869

YOKOGAWA CHINA CO., LTD.3F Tower D Cartelo Crocodile Building, No.568 West Tianshan Road, Shanghai 200335, CHINAPhone : 86-21-62396262 Fax : 86-21-62387866

YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CO., LTD.(Yokogawa B/D, Yangpyeong-dong 4-Ga), 21, Seonyu-ro 45-gil, Yeongdeungpo-gu,Seoul, 150-866, KOREAPhone : 82-2-2628-6000 Fax : 82-2-2628-6400

YOKOGAWA ENGINEERING ASIA PTE. LTD.5 Bedok South Road, Singapore 469270, SINGAPOREPhone : 65-6241-9933 Fax : 65-6241-2606

YOKOGAWA INDIA LTD.Plot No.96, Electronic City Complex, Hosur Road, Bangalore - 560 100, INDIAPhone : 91-80-4158-6000 Fax : 91-80-2852-1442

YOKOGAWA AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.Tower A, 112-118 Talavera Road, Macquarie Park NSW 2113, AUSTRALIAPhone : 61-2-8870-1100 Fax : 61-2-8870-1111

YOKOGAWA MIDDLE EAST & AFRICA B.S.C.(C)P.O. Box 10070, Manama, Building 577, Road 2516, Busaiteen 225, Muharraq, BAHRAIN Phone : 973-17-358100 Fax : 973-17-336100

Apr. '14

Printed in Japan

ys1500 indicating controller, ys1700 programmable indicating controller … · 2020-04-11 ·...

Documents